Yamaha RX-A1050 de handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-A1050

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: de handleiding

English

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

En 2

CONTENTS

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

FEATURES 6

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

PREPARATIONS 15

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 35

Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 39

Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46

11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

PLAYBACK 56

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch

(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

En 3

Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Registering an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Recalling a registered item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources

(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

CONFIGURATIONS 101

Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Configuring sound programs/surround decoders

(DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 129

Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 131

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

En 4

APPENDIX 136

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

En 5

Accessories

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

 Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

 AM antenna  FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region

of purchase.

 YPAO microphone  Power cable

*The supplied power cable varies depending on the region

of purchase.



CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)

 Easy Setup Guide

 Safety Brochure

Insert the batteries the right

way round.

Operating range of the remote control

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range

shown below.

• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model,

unless otherwise specified.

• In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples.

• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for

Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.

• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.

• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

• This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and

“iPhone” unless otherwise specified.

• indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

• indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

30° 30°

Within

6 m (20 ft)

En 6

FEATURES

What you can do with the unit

Speakers

BD/DVD player

HDMI Control

Audio/Video

TV remote control

Audio

HDMI Control

Audio

Audio/Video

Sequential operation of a TV,

AV receiver, and BD/DVD

player (HDMI Control)

. p.152

Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker

system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows

you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles.

• Automatically optimizing the speaker

settings to suit your room (YPAO)

. p.39

• Reproducing stereo or multichannel

sounds with the sound fields like

actual movie theaters and concert halls

(CINEMA DSP)

. p.60

• Enjoying compressed music with

enhanced sound (Compressed Music

Enhancer)

. p.64

• Bi-amp connections, channel

expansion (with external power-amp)

and multi-zone configurations to

enhance your system

. p.22

USB device

Audio

Network contents

Wide variety of supported content

•Bluetooth

. p.69

• iPod/iPhone

. p.70

•USB

. p.73

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.76

• Internet radio

. p.80

•AirPlay

. p.83

AV receiver (the unit)

Change the input source and favorite

settings with one touch (SCENE)

. p.57

Control

4K Ultra HD signals and

HDCP 2.2 supported

Playback of Dolby Atmos contents

supported

. p.17

iPod/iPhone/

Bluetooth device

En 7

Full of useful functions!

❑ Connecting various devices (p.30)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks

on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as

BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),

game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound

with a single HDMI cable connection

(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.28)

When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one

HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio

input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control

signals.

❑ Various wireless connection methods

(p.47)

The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to

connect to your wireless router (access point) without a

network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct

enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

without router.

❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.60)

Connecting front presence speakers allows you to

create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own

room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence

speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker

(VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. In

addition, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker

(VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of

depth to the rear sound field even when no surround

back speakers are connected.

❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed

in front (p.62)

If you have surround speakers but there is no space to

place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in

the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5

speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT).

❑ Low power consumption (p.128)

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the

unit’s power consumption.

HDMI Control

TV audio

Video from

external device

Wi-Fi or

Wireless Direct

VSBS

Useful tips

I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for

video and non-HDMI for audio...

Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the

type of an audio input jack to be used for the

corresponding input source (p.100).

Video and audio are not synchronized...

Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay

between video and audio output (p.117).

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...

Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the

output destination of signals input into the unit (p.120).

Your TV speakers may be selected as an output

destination.

I want to get more bass sounds…

Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy

enhanced bass sounds (p.99).

I want to change the on-screen menu language...

Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a

language from English, Japanese, French, German,

Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.37).

I want to update the firmware...

Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu

to update the unit’s firmware (p.134). If the unit is

connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed

on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.135).

Many other settings are available that let you to

customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.

• Input settings (p.101)

• SCENE settings (p.103)

• Sound program and surround decoder settings

(p.106)

• Various function settings (p.110)

• Information view (such as audio signal and video

signal) (p.129)

• System settings (p.131)

En 8

Useful applications

■ AV CONTROLLER

“AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into

a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network

products. This application provides you the flexibility to

control the available inputs, volume, mute, power

commands and playback source.

Functions

• Power on/off and volume adjustment

• Input, scene and sound mode selection

• DSP Parameter adjustment

• Playback control (including music selection for some

sources)

• For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or

Google Play.

■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet)

“AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you

with cable connections between AV receiver and source

devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application

guides you through the various settings such as

speaker connections, TV and video/audio device

connections and selecting the speaker system.

Functions

• Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio

devices)

• Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup

assistance with illustrations)

• Viewing owner’s manual

• For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or

Google Play.

En 9

Front panel

1 MAIN ZONE z key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator

Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the

following conditions.

• HDMI Control is enabled (p.120)

• Standby Through is enabled (p.121)

• Network Standby is enabled (p.122)

• Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.123)

• An iPod is being charged (p.70)

3 Front display

Displays information (p.11).

4 Remote control sensor

Receives remote control signals (p.5).

5 PURE DIRECT key

Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.64).

6 INPUT knob

Selects an input source.

7 Front panel door

For protecting controls and jacks (p.10).

8 VOLUME knob

Adjusts the volume.

Part names and functions

INPUT

MAIN ZONE

VOLUME

PURE DIRECT

52 3 41

Opening the front panel door

• To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently

press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed

when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door.

(Be careful not to trap your fingers.)

En 10

■ Inside of the front panel door

9 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

0 Menu operations keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

A OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.97).

B DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.96).

C TONE/BALANCE key

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range

of output sounds (p.98).

Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2

(p.91).

D STRAIGHT key

Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.63).

E PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.59).

F SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.57).

G MULTI ZONE keys

ZONE 2 Enables/disables the audio output to

Zone2 (p.90).

ZONE CONTROL Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2)

that is controlled by the keys and knobs

on the front panel (p.90).

H INFO (WPS) key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.96).

Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push

button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.50).

I MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.66).

Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.92).

J FM and AM keys

Switch between FM and AM (p.65).

K PRESET keys

Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.66).

Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.92).

L TUNING keys

Select the radio frequency (p.65).

M USB jack

For connecting a USB storage device (p.73) or an iPod

(p.70).

N YPAO MIC jack

For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.39).

O PHONES jack

For connecting headphones.

P VIDEO AUX jacks

For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game

console (p.33).

OPTION

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

RETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

(

CONNECT

)

PROGRAM

SCENE

123 4

HDMI IN

RLAUDIO

INFO(WPS)

MEMORY

FM AM

TUNING

PRESET

ENTER

5V 1A

9 A C D H I KE J LB0

M N O

En 11

Front display (indicators)

1 HDMI

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

Lights up when HDMI signals are being input.

OUT1/OUT2

Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI

signal.

2 ECO

Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.128).

3 Signal strength indicator

Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.47).

4 ZONE2

Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.90).

5 SLEEP

Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

6 Information display

Displays the current status (such as input name and sound

mode name). You can switch the information by pressing

INFO (p.96).

7 MUTE

Blinks when audio is muted.

8 Volume indicator

Indicates the current volume.

9 VIRTUAL

Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual

Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.60), or the virtual

surround processing (p.62) is working.

0 Bluetooth indicator

Lights up when the unit is connecting to a

Bluetooth

device

(p.69).

A ENHANCER

Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) is

working.

B CINEMA DSP

Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.60) is working. “CINEMA

DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60) is activated.

C STEREO

Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

TUNED

Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station

signal.

D PA RT Y

Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.91)

E Cursor indicators

Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

F ADAPTIVE DRC

Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.98) is working.

G Speaker indicators

Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.

A Front speaker (L)

S Front speaker (R)

D Center speaker

F Surround speaker (L)

G Surround speaker (R)

H Surround back speaker (L)

J Surround back speaker (R)

K Surround back speaker

B Front presence speaker (L)

N Front presence speaker (R)

L Subwoofer

OUT

21 3

VOLUME

MUTE

ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL

ZONE

ECO

SBL SBRSB

FPL

CL R

FPR

ENHANCER

PARTY

STEREO TUNED

SLEEP

ZONE

987

0 EGED

5423

FCA

En 12

Rear panel

1 PHONO jacks

For connecting to a turntable (p.32).

2 AUDIO 1–3 jacks

For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting

audio signals (p.32).

3 AV 1–4 jacks

For connecting to video/audio playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.30).

4 HDMI OUT 1 jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.28). When using ARC, TV audio signal

can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack.

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack

For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting

video/audio signals (p.30), or for connecting to an

HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.88).

5 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

component/composite video jacks

For connecting to a TV that supports component or

composite video and outputting video signals (p.29) or for

connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.87).

6 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and

inputting video/audio signals (p.30).

7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks

For connecting to video playback devices that support

component video and inputting video signals (p.31).

8 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks

For connecting to devices that support the trigger function

(p.36).

9 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that

allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another

room (p.89).

0 NETWORK jack

For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.35).

A Wireless antenna

For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.47).

B RS-232C terminal

This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation.

Consult your dealer for details.

C VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(General model only)

Selects the switch position according to your local voltage

(p.36).

D AC IN jack

For connecting the supplied power cable (p.36).

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

WIRELESS

(HDCP2.2)

1 4 :3 5 D8 9 B762

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

(U.S.A. model)

En 13

E ANTENNA jacks

For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.34).

F ZONE OUT jacks

For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and

for outputting audio (p.87).

G SPEAKERS terminals

For connecting to speakers (p.16).

H PRE OUT jacks

For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.20) or

to an external power amplifier (p.26).

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

WIRELESS

(HDCP2.2)

GE HF

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is

marked in white on the actual product to

prevent improper connections.

(U.S.A. model)

En 14

Remote control

1 Remote control signal transmitter

Transmits infrared signals.

2 z (receiver power) key

Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

3 Input selection keys

Select an input source for playback.

AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks

V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

AUDIO 1–3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks

PHONO PHONO jacks

TUNER FM/AM radio

BLUETOOTH

Bluetooth

connection

(the unit as a

Bluetooth

receiver)

USB USB jack (on the front panel)

NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select

a desired network source)

4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch

Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by

the remote control (p.90).

5 SCENE keys

Select the registered input source, sound program, and

various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when

it is in standby mode (p.57).

6 PROGRAM keys

Select a sound program (p.59).

7 External device operation keys

Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback

device (p.152).

8 ON SCREEN key

Displays the on-screen menu on the TV.

9 Menu operation keys

Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.

ENTER Confirms a selected item.

RETURN Returns to the previous screen.

0 MODE key

Switches the iPod operation modes (p.72).

A Radio keys

Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the

input source (p.65).

BAND Switches between FM and AM radio.

PRESET Select a preset station.

TUNING Select the radio frequency.

External device operation keys

Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is

selected as the input source, or control playback of the

HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.152).

B Sound mode keys

Select a sound mode (p.59).

C INFO key

Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.96).

D SLEEP key

Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a

specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press

repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off).

E Numeric keys

Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

MEMORY key

Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.66).

F HDMI OUT key

Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output

(p.56).

G PA RT Y k e y

Turns on/off the party mode (p.91).

H VOLUME keys

Adjust the volume.

I MUTE key

Mutes the audio output.

J OPTION key

Displays the option menu (p.97).

K DISPLAY key

Displays status information on the TV (p.96).

• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

For information on the keys other than those above, refer to

“Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.

ENT

MEMORY

6 87

123 4

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

123 4

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

(U.S.A. model)

En 15

PREPARATIONS

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

General setup procedure

1 Connecting speakers (p.16)

Basic speaker configuration (p.17)

Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit.

Advanced speaker configuration (p.22)

Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone

configurations to enhance the system.

2 Connecting a TV (p.28)

Connect a TV to the unit.

3 Connecting playback devices (p.30)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.34)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Connecting a network cable or preparing

the wireless antenna (p.35)

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for

establishing a wireless network connection.

6 Connecting other devices (p.36)

Connect external devices such as devices compatible with the trigger function.

7 Connecting the power cable (p.36)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.37)

Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).

Configuring the necessary speaker settings

(p.38)

According to your speaker configuration, you need to configure some speaker settings manually before

performing YPAO.

Optimizing the speaker settings

automatically (YPAO) (p.39)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room

(YPAO).

Connecting to a network device wirelessly

(p.47)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection.

En 16

The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.22).

Functions of each speaker

• We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields.

However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to

produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.60).

• Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the

speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker

settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout.

• When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL”

and “SBR” in the diagram).

Ideal speaker layout

1 Connecting speakers

Caution

• Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.20).

Speaker type Abbr. Function

Front (L) 1

Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds).

Front (R) 2

Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals).

Surround (L) 4 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also

produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back

speakers are connected.

Surround (R) 5

Surround

back (L)

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

Surround

back (R)

Front

presence (L)

Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP

3D (p.60), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional

sound field in your room.

Front

presence (R)

Subwoofer 9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces

bass parts of other channels.

This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the

unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room.

0.3 m (1 ft) or more

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

1.8 m

(5.9 ft)

0.5 to 1 m

(1.6 to 3.3 ft)

10°~30°10°~30°

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 17

Basic speaker configuration

■ Placing speakers in your room

Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your

room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples.

• To play back Dolby Atmos contents, apply a speaker system with a ★ mark.

• (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead

speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence

speaker layout” (p.19).

❑ 7.1+2-channel system [★5.1.2]

(using both surround back and front presence speakers)

This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy

a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents.

• The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit

automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.60).

❑ 7.1-channel system [★5.1.2] (using front presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This

system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents.

❑ 7.1-channel system [★7.1.0] (using surround back speakers)

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to

enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 18

❑ 5.1-channel system

This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and

surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual

Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to

the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for

7.1-channel contents.

❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers)

Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual

surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual

CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”.

• You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system).

❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers)

This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural

3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front

speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP).

❑ 2.1-channel system

Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround

speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound

(Virtual CINEMA DSP).

• Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 19

❑ Presence speaker layout

The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height, Overhead

and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment.

• You can enjoy Dolby Atmos or Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern.

Front Height

Install the presence speakers on the front side wall.

It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom

sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively.

Overhead

Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position.

It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of

front and rear sound spaces effectively.

• For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers”

(p.19).

Dolby Enabled SP

Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers.

It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from

speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers.

• Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled

speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the

Dolby Enabled speakers.

Notes on installation of ceiling speakers

When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening

position, or the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening

position.

SBR

SBL

SRFPR

FPL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 20

■ Setting the speaker impedance

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a

6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case,

you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall

outlet.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press

MAIN ZONE z.

Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the

power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

■ Connecting speakers

Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.

Speakers to be connected

If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front

presence speakers (*2).

If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence

speakers (*4).

• You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit.

• To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an

external power amplifier” (p.26).

Caution

• Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified

contractor or dealer personnel for installation works.

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN

¡SPEAKER¡IMP.

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the

speakers.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Room Speaker type Abbr.

Speaker system

(the number of channels)

Power Amp

Assign

(p.113)

7+2 7 5 2

Main zone

Front (L) 1 ●●●●

Basic (default)

Front (R) 2 ●●●●

Center 3 ●●●

Surround (L) 4 ●●*3

Surround (R) 5 ●●*3

Surround

back (L)

6 ● *1

Surround

back (R)

7 ● *1

Front

presence (L)

E ● *2 *4

Front

presence (R)

R ● *2 *4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 21

Cables necessary for connection (commercially available)

Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)

Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers)

Connection diagram

Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit.

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side).

❑ Connecting speaker cables

Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the

unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are

colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire

to the positive terminal.

a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and

twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together.

b Loosen the speaker terminal.

c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the

terminal.

d Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug

(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)

a Tighten the speaker terminal.

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier)

Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.

–

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

FRONT

+ (red)

– (black)

FRONT

Banana plug

(

SINGLE

)

SUBWOOFER

PRE OUT

CENTER

SUR. BACKSURRUND

SURROUND BACK

Audio pin cable

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 22

Advanced speaker configuration

In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.17), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system.

Using the four internal

amplifiers for front speakers to

have more high-quality sounds

(Example) (Example) (Example)

Bi-amp

connection

Combining with an external

power amplifier (Hi-Fi

amplifier, etc.) to build an

extended system

Using the excess internal

amplifiers for stereo speakers

in another room

External power

amplifier

Main zone

Zone2

Bi-amp connection Power-amp channel expansion Multi-zone configuration

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 23

■ Available speaker configurations

• When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the

“Setup” menu (p.38).

❑ 5ch BI-AMP

Main zone

Multi-zone

Power Amp Assign

(p.113)

Page

Output

channel

(max)

Bi-amp

External

power

amplifier

(required)

5  5ch BI-AMP 23

7 

Surround

back

5ch BI-AMP +SB 24

7 +1 (Zone2) 7ch +1ZONE 24

Bi-amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 (not used)

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 24

❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB ❑ 7ch +1ZONE

Bi-amp

via external amp

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection)

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Main zone

Zone2

• When Zone2 output is enabled (p.90), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound.

Speaker Connect to

12 FRONT

3 CENTER

45 SURROUND

67 SURROUND BACK

ER (not used)

9 SUBWOOFER 1–2

Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 25

■

Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections

When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the

FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals.

To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup”

menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.38).

• The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals.

■ Connecting Zone2 speakers

When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals.

To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp

Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall

outlet (p.38).

• You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.87).

Caution

• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a

tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp

connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker

cables.

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R L R R RL L L

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R L R R RL L L

SINGLE

EXTRA SP

The unit (rear)

Main zone

Zone2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 26

■ Connecting an external power amplifier

When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the

input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel

signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS

terminals.

1 FRONT jacks

Output front channel sounds.

2 SURROUND jacks

Output surround channel sounds.

3 SUR. BACK jacks

Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect

the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side).

4 CENTER jack

Outputs center channel sounds.

(Example)

Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier

About external power amplifiers

We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions.

• With unbalanced inputs

• With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit)

• Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 )

Caution

• To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making

connections.

– Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them.

– When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS

terminals.

– When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of

the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to

the pre-main amplifier.

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

WIRELESS

1 2 34

The unit (rear)

HDMI

2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK

OUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

OUT/

WIRELESS

MAIN IN

FRONT

The unit (rear)

PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks

Main input jack

Amplifier with

volume control

bypass

(such as A-S3000)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 27

■ Video/audio jacks

❑ HDMI jacks

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single

jack. Use an HDMI cable.

• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using

a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality

degradation.

• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return

Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission

features.

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos.

■ Video jacks

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Transmit video signals separated into three

components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (P

B),

and chrominance red (P

R). Use a component video

cable with three plugs.

❑ VIDEO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

■ Audio jacks

❑ OPTICAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical

cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before

using the cable.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial

cable.

❑ AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin

cable (RCA cable).

Input/output jacks and cables

AV 1

HDMI cable

AV 1

Component video cable

AV 1

Video pin cable

Digital optical cable

Digital coaxial cable

Stereo pin cable

En 28

Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.

You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.

To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI

cable.

■ HDMI connection

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or

stereo pin cable).

• You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.30).

• You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases:

– If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC)

– If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box

• If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s

power and volume with the TV’s remote control.

To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For

details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.152).

■ Component/composite video connection

When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to

the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be

output to the TV.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

• If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable

connection between the TV and the unit.

2 Connecting a TV

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SURROUND

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND S

(

AV 1

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

O O

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT jack

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI input

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

• ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a

single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 29

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

ONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

L R

SIN

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

B PR

PRPB

AV 1

COM

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

PB PR

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

O O

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video input

(component video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV

(HDCP

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SURRO

SURROUND

L R

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

B PR

PRPB

AV 1

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

OPTICAL

AUDIO 1

(2 TV)

AUDIO

OPTICAL

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack

Video input (composite video)

AUDIO 1

(OPTICAL or AUDIO)

jacks

Audio output

(digital optical or analog stereo)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 30

■ Connecting another TV or a projector

The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit

with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching

videos with the remote control (p.56).

• HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack.

• If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for

Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.88).

The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow

you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect

an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.

• Connecting an iPod (p.70)

• Connecting a USB storage device (p.73)

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)

Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game

consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video

device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI

connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than

HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.151).

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ),

COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.100) in the “Option” menu.

■ HDMI connection

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SURROUND

FRONT

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI OUT

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

The unit

(rear)

HDMI OUT 2 jack

HDMI input

Projector

TV (already connected)

3 Connecting playback devices

I OUT

ARC

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV 3 AV 4

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

CENTERSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

L R RL L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

P2.2)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI output

Video device

HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 31

■ Component video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable

(digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the

unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

■ Composite video connection

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital

coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)

depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio

played back on the video device will be output from the unit.

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Component video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESE

L R RL

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

TRIGG

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

C C

The unit (rear)

AV 1–3

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(component video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Video Audio

Composite video

Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DV

AV 1

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZON

ZONE 2

(HDCP2.2)

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

VIDEO

C C

The unit (rear)

AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks

Video output

(composite video)

Video device

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL),

AV 3 (OPTICAL),

AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 32

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)

Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit.

Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the

following connections.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment”

setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL

(a, b, f) jacks to another input source.

• If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit

will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.100) in the “Option” menu.

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3 or PHONO on the remote

control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit.

Audio output jacks on audio device Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital coaxial

AV 1–2 (COAXIAL)

AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 3 (OPTICAL)

AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 1–4 (AUDIO)

AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO)

Turntable (PHONO) PHONO

When connecting a turntable

• The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a

low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer.

• Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal.

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SURROUND

FRONT

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

PHONO

GND

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

PHONO

GND

C C

Audio output

(any of digital coaxial, digital optical,

analog stereo)

Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3

(COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks

The unit

(rear)

Audio device

PHONO jacks

Audio output

(PHONO)

Turntable

Ground lead

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 33

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel

Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit.

Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see

“Connecting an iPod” (p.70) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.73).

Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit.

❑ HDMI connection

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the

unit with an HDMI cable.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the

video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT

jack of the unit (p.28).

• You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device.

• The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2.

❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection

Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a

video pin cable and a stereo pin cable.

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played

back on the device will be output from the unit.

• If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO)

jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

DISPLAY

RETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

(

CONNECT

)

PROGRAM

HDMI IN

RLAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 1A

HDMI

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

DISPLAY

RETURN

MULTI ZONE

VIDEO AUX

ZONE 2

ZONE CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

(

CONNECT

)

PROGRAM

HDMI IN

RLAUDIO

FM AM

TUNING

ENTER

5V 1A

V RL

Game console

Camcorder

The unit (front)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 34

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.

Assembling the AM antenna

Connecting the AM antenna

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.

• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

L R RL L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

FM antenna

AM antenna

The unit (rear)

Hold down Insert Release

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 35

Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless

antenna for establishing a wireless network connection.

You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and

Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

Connecting the network cable

Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5

or higher straight cable).

• If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set

“Network Connection” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”.

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,

as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to

configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network

parameters manually (p.121).

• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in

“Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)

may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the

security software or firewall settings appropriately.

• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

Preparing the wireless antenna

If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up

straight.

For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see

“Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.47).

• Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it.

5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna

AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

WIRELESS

LAN

WAN

Network Attached Storage

(NAS)

Internet

Modem

Router

Network cable

The unit (rear)

Mobile device

(such as iPod touch

and iPhone)

WIRELESS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 36

Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function

The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the

unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the

trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks

with a monaural mini-plug cable.

• You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.127) in the

“Setup” menu.

After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit

and then to an AC wall outlet.

6 Connecting other devices

HDMI

AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACK

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

R R RL L L

SINGLE

OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

OUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

WIRE

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

The unit (rear)

TRIGGER OUT

1–2 jacks

System connector

jack

Yamaha subwoofer that

supports a system connection

7 Connecting the power cable

Before connecting the power cable (General model only)

Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.

Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC

wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a

potential fire hazard.

AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

CE/

RL L

RS-232C

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

WIRELESS

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

220V-

240V

110V-

120V

The unit (rear)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

OUT

OTE

AC IN

CENTER FRONT

R L

RS-232C

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

WIRELESS

To an AC wall outlet

The unit (rear)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 37

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English

(default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and

Chinese.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and

the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired

language.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

8 Selecting an on-screen menu language

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

NER

MAIN

SCEN

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUDIO

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 38

If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the

procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings

manually before performing YPAO.

• Advanced speaker configuration (p.22)

• Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual

CINEMA FRONT) (p.18)

• Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback (p.19)

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker”

and then “Manual Setup”.

Configure the corresponding speaker settings.

When using any of advanced speaker configurations

a Use the cursor keys to select “Power Amp Assign” (p.113) and

press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your speaker system and

press ENTER.

When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel

system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” 

“Layout”  “Surround” (p.114).

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Front” and press ENTER.

When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos

playback

a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration” 

“Layout”  “Front Presence” (p.114).

b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your front presence

speaker layout and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

NER

MAIN

SCEN

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUDIO

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 39

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function

detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to

your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the

speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic

parameters, to suit your room.

• The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control)

technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically

designed for acoustic perfection.

• Note the following regarding YPAO measurement.

– Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children.

– Test tone volume cannot be adjusted.

– Keep the room as quiet as possible.

– Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not

become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone.

– Do not connect headphones.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network

setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3.

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If

the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to

maximum.

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position

and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.

• Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your

ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can

use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone.

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

VOLUME HIGH CUT

CROSSOVER/

MIN MAXMIN MAX

YPAO MIC

The unit (front)

YPAO

microphone

Ear height

YPAO MIC

jack

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

RETURN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 40

The following screen appears on the TV.

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting

the measurement.

If desired, change the measuring method

(multi/single).

a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER.

b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER.

Settings

• If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to

enjoy surround sound in a wider space.

• If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening

position you will be seated most frequently.

This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the

measurement.

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”:

“Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.42)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”:

“Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.41)

Yes

Select this option if you will have several listening

positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound.

You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions

in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit

the area defined by those positions (multi measure).

No (default)

Select this option if your listening position will always be

fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The

speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position

(single measure).

a b

bac

Multi measure

(5 listening positions)

Multi measure

(2 listening positions + front/back)

Multi measure

(1 listening position + front/back/left/right)

Single measure

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 41

Measuring at one listening position

(single measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for

measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the

measurement.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement finishes.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)

appears, see “Error messages” (p.45) or “Warning messages” (p.46).

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.44).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement results, use the cursor

keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”

to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are

automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy

natural sounds even at low volume.

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.98) in the

“Option” menu.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 42

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Measuring at multiple listening positions

(multi measure)

When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for

measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening

positions.

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears,

see “Error messages” (p.45) or “Warning messages” (p.46).

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Measure” and press ENTER.

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER

again to start the measurement immediately.

• To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN.

The following screen appears on the TV when the

measurement at the first position finishes.

Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening

position and press ENTER.

Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions

(up to 8) have been taken.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 43

When the measurements at the positions you want

to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to

select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

When you have taken measurements at 8 listening

positions, the following screen appears automatically.

• To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see

“Checking the measurement results” (p.44).

Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and

press ENTER.

To save the measurement result, use the cursor

keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO”

to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER.

• If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are

automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy

natural sounds even at low volume.

• You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.98) in the

“Option” menu.

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

Caution

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere

where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on

top of AV equipment).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 44

Checking the measurement results

You can check the YPAO measurement results.

After the measurement, use the cursor keys to

select “Result” and press ENTER.

• You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu,

which displays the previous measurement results.

The following screen appears.

1 Measurement result items

2 Measurement result details

3 The number of measured positions (when multi

measure is performed)

Use the cursor keys to select an item.

To finish checking the results and return to the

previous screen, press RETURN.

Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments

When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not

suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings

and reload the previous YPAO adjustments.

In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto

Setup”, and then “Result” (p.109).

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and

press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Wiring

Polarity of each speaker

Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the

reverse polarity (+/-).

Size

Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the

subwoofer)

Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals

effectively.

Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency

signals effectively.

Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker

Level Output level adjustment for each speaker

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 45

Error messages

If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1:No Front SP Front speakers are not detected.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections.E-2:No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected.

E-3:No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected.

E-4:SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the

on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5:Noisy The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select

“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected.

E-6:Check Sur.

Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround

speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen

instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers.

E-7:No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again.

E-8:No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the

measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service

center.

E-9:User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”.

E-10:Internal Err. An internal error has occurred.

Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact

the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 46

Warning messages

If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.

However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1:Out of Phase

A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity

(+/-).

Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.44) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by

“Reverse”.

If the speaker is connected incorrectly:

Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable.

If the speaker is connected correctly:

Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are

connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message.

W-2:Over Distance

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening

position.

Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.44) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m

(80 ft) of the listening position.

W-3:Level Error

There are significant volume differences between the

speakers.

Select “Level” in “Result” (p.44) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage

environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend

using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 47

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a

wireless connection.

Selecting the connection method

Select a connection method according to your network environment.

■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point)

Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point).

You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

on the unit.

For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.48).

• You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection

(p.35) or Wireless Direct (p.54).

• If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless

router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other.

■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point)

Connect a mobile device to the unit directly.

You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the

unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit.

For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly

(Wireless Direct)” (p.54).

• You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.35) or the

wireless network connection (p.48).

• When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Internet radio

–Network services

– Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS)

• For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website.

11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly

The unit

Wireless router

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

Internet

Modem

The unit

Mobile device

(such as iPhone)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 48

Connecting the unit to a wireless network

There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless

network.

Select a connection method according to your environment.

■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting

You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the

connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch).

Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a

wireless router.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”.

Yes

Do you own iOS devices

(iPhone/iPod touch)?

Yes

A (p.48)

B (p.50)

Does your wireless router

(access point) have a WPS

button?

C (p.51)

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

NER

MAIN

SCEN

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUDIO

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 49

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the

desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

The following connection methods are available.

❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly

If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform

the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The

following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.)

On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay

speaker in the Wi-Fi screen.

Check the network currently selected and tap

“Next”.

When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically

connected to the selected network (access point).

Wireless (WAC)

You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device

to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see

“Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”.

(You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.)

USB Cable

You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device

to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing

the iOS device setting using a USB cable”.

(You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.)

The name of the unit

Tap here to start setup

The network currently selected

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 50

❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable

If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the

procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit.

Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable

the screen lock on the iOS device.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and

press ENTER.

Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS

device.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ B: Using the WPS push button

configuration

You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the

WPS button.

• This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router

(access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for

3 seconds.

“Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front

display.

Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access

point).

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the front display.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

DISPLAY

RETURN

VIDEO AUX

ZONE

CONTROL

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO

RLAUDIO

5V 1A

The unit (front)

About WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance,

which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 51

■ C: Using other connection methods

If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push

button configuration method, follow the procedure below to

configure the wireless network settings.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the

desired connection method and select “NEXT”.

The following connection methods are available.

WPS Button

You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS

button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the

instructions displayed on the TV screen.

Share Wi-Fi

Settings (iOS)

See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.48).

Access Point

Scan

You can set up a wireless connection by searching

for an access point. For details on settings, see

“Searching for an access point” (p.52).

Manual Setting

You can set up a wireless connection by entering

the required information (such as SSID)

manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up

the wireless connection manually” (p.52).

PIN Code

You can set up a wireless connection by entering

the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access

point). The method is available if the wireless

router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code

method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN

code” (p.53).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

NER

MAIN

SCEN

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUDIO

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 52

❑ Searching for an access point

If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the

unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of

available access points appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the

desired access point and select “NEXT”.

The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually

If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the

wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV.

You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method

and security key for your network.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of

the access point and select “NEXT”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the

security method of the access point and select

“NEXT”.

Settings

None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 53

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available.

Proceed to Step 4.

If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or

10 or 26 hexadecimal digits.

If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character

string, or 64 hexadecimal digits.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is

entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

❑ Using the PIN code

If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of

available access points appears on the TV screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the

desired access point and select “NEXT”.

The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen.

Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router

(access point).

For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the

wireless router (access point).

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT”

and press ENTER to start the connection process.

When the connection process finishes, “Completed”

appears on the TV screen.

If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try

another connection method.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 54

Connecting a mobile device to the unit

directly (Wireless Direct)

Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit

directly.

• Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not

strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless

devices connected to the unit without permission.

Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display

video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to

the unit via HDMI.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network

Connection” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check

“Wireless Direct” and select “OK”.

• The checkmark indicates the current setting.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the

desired security method and select “NEXT”.

Settings

None, WPA2-PSK (AES)

• If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the

communication is not encrypted.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

NER

MAIN

SCEN

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUDIO

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 55

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the

security key and select “NEXT”.

If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available.

Proceed to Step 10.

Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64

hexadecimal digits.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press

ENTER to save the setting.

The settings made appear on the TV screen.

The SSID and security key information is required for setup

of a mobile device.

Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device.

For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the

instruction manual of the mobile device.

a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device.

b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available

access points.

c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key

displayed in Step 10.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

Cursor keys

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

En 56

PLAYBACK

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or

BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.65)

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.69)

• Playing back iPod music (p.70)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.73)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.76)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.80)

• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or

TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.98).

On-screen input selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and

press ENTER.

Selecting an HDMI output jack

Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack.

Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be

used for signal output changes.

• You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.57).

• When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest

resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For

example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p

TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.)

• If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125)), you

can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly.

Basic playback procedure

OUT 1+2

Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1

and HDMI OUT 2 jacks.

OUT 1

Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack.

OUT 2

Off Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

OUT1+2

HDMIOUTSel.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

MAIN

SCEN

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

R. DE

ON SCREEN

ENTER

VOLUME

MUTE

HDMI OUT

Cursor keys

Input selection keys

En 57

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch.

You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source.

Press SCENE.

The input source and settings registered to the

corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on

automatically when it is in standby mode.

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

• You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control.

Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes

from the “Scene” menu (p.103).

On-screen scene selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press

ENTER.

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

SCENE (SCENE key)

Input

Input (p.56) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER

Audio Select (p.100) Auto Auto — —

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.56) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2

Mode

DSP Program (p.59) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo

Pure Direct Mode (p.118) Auto Auto Auto Auto

Enhancer (p.64) Off On On On

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.100) On On On On

BD/DVD

NET

RADIO

ENT

MEMORY

6 87

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ON SCREEN

ENTER

SCENE

Cursor keys

En 58

Configuring scene assignments

Set the unit to the condition (such as input source

and sound program) that you want to assign to a

scene.

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET

Complete” appears on the front display.

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external

device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify

the device type in “Device Control” (p.104) in the “Scene” menu.

• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of

the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details,

refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM.

Selecting setting items to be included as

scene assignments

In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output

and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the

scene assignments in “Detail” (p.104) in the “Scene” menu.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SETComplete

SCENE1

Sound

Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC,

Extra Bass

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue

Level, Subwoofer Trim

Video Video Mode

Volume Master Volume

Lipsync Lipsync, Delay

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

SCENE

En 59

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and

surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with

your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo

playback).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies

• Press MOVIE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing

video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.60).

❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or

stereo playback

• Press MUSIC repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening

music sources or stereo playback (p.61).

❑ Selecting a surround decoder

• Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from

2-channel sources (p.63).

❑ Switching to the straight decode mode

• Press STRAIGHT.

This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels

(p.63).

❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode

• Press PURE DIRECT.

This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the

electrical noise from other circuitry (p.64).

❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer

• Press ENHANCER.

This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth

and breadth (p.64).

On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection

a Press ON SCREEN.

b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround

decoder and press ENTER.

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing

PROGRAM.

• You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in

the “DSP Program” menu (p.105).

• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.

• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the

speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.11) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in

the “Information” menu (p.129).

Selecting the sound mode

About Dolby Atmos

• Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus or

multichannel PCM format in the following situations.

– Any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected.

– Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used.

– Headphones are used (2-channel playback).

• When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such

as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.62), YPAO Volume (p.98) or Compressed

Music Enhancer (p.64) does not work.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

1 2 3

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

P-

MEN

INF

LEE

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

BD/DVD

RADI

AUX

1 2

USB

NET

MOVIE

MUSIC

SUR.DECODE

STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

PURE DIRECT

ON SCREEN

ENTER

PROGRAM

Cursor keys

En 60

Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D)

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP

technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual

movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound

fields.

• To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”.

• We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic

sound fields. However, even when no front presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual

Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound

fields.

• If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected,

the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of

depth to the rear sound field.

• When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)

The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as

movies, TV programs, and games.

❑ MOVIE THEATER

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

HallinVienna

CLASSICAL

MUSIC

“CINEMA DSP n” lights up

Sound program category

Sound program

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling

without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,

such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the

ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful

reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie

productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the

cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing

everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the

latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically

created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue,

sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and

adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but

puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,

powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth

creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of

the sounds and the separation of the channels.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of

movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The

reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and

background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge

on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long

periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,

in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a

pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate

reverberation to the original audio.

En 61

❑ ENTERTAINMENT

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback

(MUSIC)

The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.

You can also select stereo playback.

❑ CLASSICAL

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts

and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’

voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the

stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of

the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting

games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player

feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater

concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music

Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This

program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction

of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of

scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer

for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as

if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere

thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound

field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound

field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

Recital/Opera

This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and

emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations

of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the

acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround

sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are

used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be

fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500

seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful

reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s

virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a

shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings

create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,

producing a very full, rich sound.

Hall in Amsterdam

The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage.

Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely.

Church in Freiburg

Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a

pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the

high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial

reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself

reproduces the atmosphere of the church.

Church in

Royaumont

This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall)

of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the

outskirts of Paris.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an

audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable

for courtly music and chamber music.

En 62

❑ LIVE/CLUB

❑ STEREO

• CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.62) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is

selected.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers

(Virtual CINEMA DSP)

If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no

surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround

technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the

well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using

presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field.

• When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in

front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT)

If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your

room, you can place them in the front (p.18) and enjoy multichannel surround sound

using Virtual CINEMA FRONT.

When “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates

the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel

surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front.

• When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display.

■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones

(SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with

stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting

a sound program or a surround decoder.

Village Vanguard

The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low

ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in

the center.

Warehouse Loft

The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the

concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and

homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that

make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert

venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the

hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a

famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left

and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When

multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and

output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

7ch Stereo

Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back

multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and

then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

En 63

Enjoying unprocessed playback

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect

processing.

■ Playing back in original channels

(straight decode)

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces

stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as

CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for

multichannel sources.

Press STRAIGHT.

Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is

enabled or disabled.

• If “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual

CINEMA FRONT (p.62) works when multichannel source is played back.

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in

multichannel (surround decoder)

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel

playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources.

• Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system

and the selected decode type (p.106).

• For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.146).

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.

Each time you press the key, the surround decoder

changes.

OUT

VOL UME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

STRAIGHT

bSurround

Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all

sources. A real acoustic space (including

overhead) will be created especially when

object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content)

is played.

bPLIIx Movie Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will

be output from the surround/surround back

speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

bPLII Movie

bPLIIx Music Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will

be output from the surround/surround back

speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

bPLII Music

bPLIIx Game Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro

Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will

be output from the surround/surround back

speakers even when 2-channel source is input.

bPLII Game

Neo:6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix

decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be

output from the surround/surround back speakers.

Neo:6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix

decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output

from the surround/surround back speakers.

OUT

VOL UME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE

¡SUR.¡DECODE

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

1 2 3

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

RADI

AUX

USB

NET

STRAIGHT

SUR.DECODE

En 64

• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are

connected or when “Surround Back” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to

“None”.

• When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing

(such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.62), YPAO Volume (p.98) or

Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) does not work.

• If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back

speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except

when a Dolby Atmos content is played).

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct)

When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the

selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the

electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It

allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

Press PURE DIRECT.

Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is

enabled or disabled.

• When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available.

– Some settings for the speakers or sound programs

– Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu

– Using the multi-zone function

– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced

sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the

sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original

sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along

with any other sound modes.

In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of

uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC)

when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.100) in the “Option” menu is set to “On”

(default).

Press ENHANCER.

Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer

is enabled or disabled.

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling

rate is over 48 kHz.

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.99) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable

Compressed Music Enhancer.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

PUREDIRECT

SBL SBRSB

CL R

VOLUME

ENHANCER

EnhancerOn

“ENHANCER” lights up

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

1 2 3

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

RADI

AUX

1 2

R. DE

USB

NET

PURE DIRECT

ENHANCER

En 65

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or

selecting from registered radio stations.

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is

being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used

in U.K. and Europe models.

• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM

antennas.

Setting the frequency steps

(Asia and General models only)

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and

9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the

frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

Set the unit to standby mode.

When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,

press MAIN ZONE z.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ

STEP”.

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby

mode and turn it on again.

Selecting a frequency for reception

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM).

Use the following keys to set a frequency.

TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the

key for about a second to search stations automatically.

Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to

select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio

station.

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of

reception range.

• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM

radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.100) in the “Option” menu. When the signal

reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may

improve it.

Listening to FM/AM radio

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CLR

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM87.50MHz

SBL SBRSB

CL R

VOLUME

TUNEDSTEREO

FM98.50MHz

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

ENHAN

PRE

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

TUNING

BAND

TUNER

Numeric keys

En 66

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have

registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their

preset numbers.

• You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using

“Auto Preset” (p.68).

■ Registering a radio station

Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.65)

to tune into the desired radio station.

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.

The first time that you do register a station, the selected

radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.

Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered

to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most

recently registered number.

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning

into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a

preset number, and then press MEMORY again.

■ Selecting a preset station

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio

station.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by

using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.68).

SBL SBRSB

CL R

VOLUME

TUNEDSTEREO

PresetOK

Preset

01:FM98.50MHz

Preset number

SBL SBRSB

CL R

VOLUME

TUNEDSTEREO

FM98.50MHz

Preset

01:Empty

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

SBL SBRSB

CL R

VOLUME

TUNEDSTEREO

Preset

01:FM98.50MHz

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

ENHAN

NIN

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

MAIN

SCEN

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUDIO

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNER

Numeric keys

En 67

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

NER

MAIN

SCEN

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUDIO

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

INFO

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Radio Data System tuning

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM

stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of

Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program

Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio

Data System broadcasting station.

■

Displaying the Radio Data System information

Tune into the desired Radio Data System

broadcasting station.

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System

broadcasting stations (p.68).

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not

displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System

service.

■ Receiving traffic information

automatically

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit

automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,

follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”

(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.

The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.

Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor

keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the

search finishes.

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information

stations are found.

Program Service Program service name

Program Type Current program type

Radio Text Information on the current program

Clock Time Current time

DSP Program Sound mode name

Audio Decoder Decoder name

VOLUME

SBL SBR

CL R

STEREO TUNED

ProgramType

Info

Item name

VOLUME

SBL SBR

CL R

STEREO TUNED

CLASSICS

FM98.50MHz

Information

Frequency (always displayed)

VOLUME

SBL SBR

CL R

STEREO TUNED

TPFM101.30MHz

TrafficProgram

Finished

Traffic information station (frequency)

Cursor keys

En 68

Operating the radio on the TV

You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the

TV.

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input

source.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

■ Playback screen

1 Radio station information

Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected

band (FM/AM) and frequency.

(U.K. and Europe models only)

When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67), the

Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,”

“Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed.

2 TUNED/STEREO indicators

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station.

“STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Browse screen

1 Preset station list

Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a

preset station and press ENTER to tune into it.

2 Preset number

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

To close the submenu, press RETURN.

• (U.K. and Europe models only)

Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto

Preset”.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list).

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Submenu Function

Utility

Memory

Registers the current station to the

preset number selected in the list.

Auto Preset

Automatically registers FM radio

stations with strong signals (up to 40

stations).

Clear Preset

Clear the preset station selected in the

list.

Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations.

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the

list.

1 Page Down

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows

the background. Press one of the

menu operation keys to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

OUT

MAIN

SCEN

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUDIO

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

RETURN

TUNER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 69

You can play back music files stored on a

Bluetooth

device (such

as smartphones) on the unit.

• To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file

formats” (p.150).

Playing back

Bluetooth

device music on the

unit

Follow the procedure below to establish a

Bluetooth

connection

between a

Bluetooth

device (such as smartphones) and the unit,

and play back music stored the

Bluetooth

device on the unit.

• The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth.

Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the

input source.

On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network

name of the unit) from the available device list.

A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will

be made.

If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”.

On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start

playback.

The playback screen (artist name, album name and song

title) is displayed on the TV.

• “Not found” appears when no Bluetooth devices are detected.

• If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit

automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish

another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth

connection.

• To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following

operations.

– Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device.

– Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit.

– Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on

the remote control to control playback.

Playing back music via Bluetooth

The unit

Bluetooth device

(such as smartphones)

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

BLUETOOTH

External device

operation keys

En 70

You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable

supplied with the iPod.

• For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats”

(p.150).

• The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on

the unit, use AirPlay (p.83).

Connecting an iPod

Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the

iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby

mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If

“Network Standby” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to

charge without limit.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

Playback of iPod content

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start

playback.

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the

simple play mode (p.72).

Playing back iPod music

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

5V 1A

The unit (front)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

NET

ENTER

RETURN

USB

Cursor keys

En 71

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control

playback.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 72

■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play)

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.

The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are

enabled.

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

Operate your iPod itself to start playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or

press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Albums

(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order.

“x” appears in the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly.

“v” appears in the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

MODE

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 73

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on

the unit.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or

FAT32 format).

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats”

(p.150).

Connecting a USB storage device

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In

this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

• Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack.

• Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use

extension cables.

Playback of USB storage device contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device

contents and start playback.

You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed

on the TV screen.

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is

displayed.

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

OPTION

SCREEN

DISPLAY

RETURN

YPAO MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

TONE/BALANCE

STRAIGHT

(

CONNECT

)

PROGRAM

ENTER

5V 1A

The unit (front)

USB storage device

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

Connected

USB

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

NET

USB

En 74

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly

by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92).

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys

(q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

En 75

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the

remote control to control playback.

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB

storage device contents.

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press

OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 76

You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.35). You can check

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”

(p.130) in the “Information” menu.

• The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired

network connection.

• For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150).

Media sharing setup

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to

configure the media sharing setting on each music server.

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed

❑ For Windows Media Player 12

Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC.

Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”.

Click “Turn on media streaming”.

Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model

name.

Click “OK” to exit.

❑ For Windows Media Player 11

Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.

Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”.

Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click

“Allow”.

Click “OK” to exit.

• For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software

installed

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media

sharing settings.

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

En 77

Playback of PC music contents

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and

start playback.

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV

screen.

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the

playback screen is displayed.

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and

press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback

screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

• If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden

files) during playback, playback stops automatically.

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly

by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Cursor keys

En 78

■ Browse screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an

item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Status indicators

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status

(such as play/pause).

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control

playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS).

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.102).

Menu Function

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Function

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 79

■ Shuffle/repeat settings

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC

music content.

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,

press OPTION.

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or

“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Item Setting Function

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album

(folder) in random order.

“x” appears on the TV screen.

Repeat

(Repeat)

Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.

“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album

(folder) repeatedly.

“v” appears on the TV screen.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

REE

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

OPTION

ENTER

RETURN

Cursor keys

En 80

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.35). You can

check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly

assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu.

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

Playback of Internet radio

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the

input source.

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press

ENTER.

If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and

the playback screen is displayed.

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by

selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92).

Listening to Internet radio

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

ENTER

RETURN

NET

Cursor keys

En 81

■ Browse screen

1 Playback indicator

2 List name

3 Contents list

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to

select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

4 Item number/total

5 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select

an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection.

• You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop

playback.

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

Menu Function

Bookmark On

(Bookmark Off)

Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from

the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82).

1 Page Up

Moves to the previous/next page of the list.

1 Page Down

10 Pages Up

Moves 10 pages forward/backward.

10 Pages Down

Return Returns to the higher-level list.

Now Playing Moves to the playback screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

Menu Function

Bookmark On

Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder

(p.82).

Browse Moves to the browse screen.

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 82

Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks)

By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”,

you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the

browse screen.

■ Registering the station on the

browse/playback screen

Select the desired Internet radio station in the

browse screen or start playback of it to display the

playback screen.

Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On”

and press ENTER.

The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder.

• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the

“Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”.

■ Registering the station on the vTuner

website

Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit.

This operation is necessary to register the radio station for

the first time.

Check the vTuner ID of the unit.

You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.130) in the

“Information” menu.

Access the vTuner website

(http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on

your PC and enter the vTuner ID.

• To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your

account using your e-mail address.

Click the “Add” icon (

❤

+) next to the station name.

• To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in

the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (

❤

–) next to the station

name.

You can switch the language.

Enter the vTuner ID in this area.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 83

The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check

whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network”

(p.130) in the “Information” menu.

• When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to

connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

• For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150).

• You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.95).

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents

Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit.

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback

screen on the iPod.

If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( ) appears.

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly.

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit

(network name of the unit) as the audio output device.

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback.

The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

Playing back music with AirPlay

iTunes

iPhone/iPad/

iPod touch

Router

(wired or wireless)

The unit

(wired or wireless)

iTunes (example) iPod iOS6 (example)iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example)

iTunes (example) iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

En 84

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by

setting “Network Standby” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on

iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu.

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the

iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

• You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable

volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.102) in the “Input”

menu to “Off”.

■ Playback screen

1 Playback indicator

2 Playback information

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining

time.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information.

3 Operation menu

Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the

selection.

• You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the

remote control to control playback.

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to

configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers

in advance.

Caution

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be

unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the

volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod

immediately.

Menu Function

Screen Off

Closes the screen display and shows the

background. Press one of the menu operation keys

to redisplay it.

iTunes (example of English version)

Check this box

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

PLA

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

Menu operation keys

Cursor keys

External device

operation keys

En 85

The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room

where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2).

For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person

can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2).

Multi-zone configuration examples

■ Enjoying music in another room

You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room.

Connections

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.25

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87

■ Enjoying videos/music in another room

You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room.

❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers

Connections

TV (for analog video playback): p.87

TV (for digital video playback): p.88

Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.25

Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87

Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone)

• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in

Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.152).

• Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that

you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone

connections that best meet your requirements.

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT)

Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI)

En 86

❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV

Connection

TV: p.88

Preparing Zone2

Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit.

■ Connecting speakers to play back audio

Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies

depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier).

❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier

Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see

“Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.25).

Living room (main zone)

Study room

(Zone2)

Video/audio (HDMI)

Caution

• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external

amplifier.

• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the

unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit,

“Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

En 87

❑ Using an external amplifier

Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a

stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier.

■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos

Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2. Depending on the video

input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection

methods.

• The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2 video output. To watch

videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to

the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD

player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable.

To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video monitor, set “Monitor

Out Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SURROUND

FRONT

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

AUDIO

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT

(ZONE 2) jacks

Zone2

Main zone

External amplifier

Audio input

(analog stereo)

HDMI OUT

ARC

ONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5

AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

COAXIAL

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–A

ZON

L R RL

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

B PR

PRPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

(HDCP2.2)

YPB PR

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

The unit (rear)

ZONE OUT jacks

(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO)

Zone2

Main zone

Video input

(component video or

composite video)

En 88

■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio

Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at

Zone2.

• To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit

with an HDMI cable (p.30).

• We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit.

• On-screen operations are not available for Zone2.

To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign”

(p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”.

• When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output

from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default).

• You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.25).

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

AV 1

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

HDMI OUT

(ZONE OUT)

(HDCP2.2)

HDMI

The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

Main zone

(Example: using a TV)

HDMI input

Zone2

• Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is

performed.

– Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input

– Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source

– Changing the sound mode or audio settings

En 89

■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection)

You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control

supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks.

• (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for

each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.

Remote connections between Yamaha products

An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that

support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals

by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an

infrared signal receiver.

HDMI

AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

SPEAKERS

CENTERSURROUND BACK

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

L R R RL L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

RS-23

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

B PR

PRPB

RPB

YPRPB

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

IN OUT

REMOTE

The unit (rear)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

External device

(such as a CD player)

Remote control

(supplied with each device)

Infrared signal

receiver

Zone2

Main zone

Infrared signal

transmitter

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

REMOTE

Remote control

Infrared signal

receiver

Yamaha products

(up to six, including the unit)

REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

Zone2

En 90

Controlling Zone2

Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”.

Press z (receiver power).

Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled.

When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front

display.

Use the input selection keys to select an input

source.

• Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you

connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see

“Multi-zone output” (p.152).

• You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each

zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is

selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches

to “SERVER”.

Start playback on the external device or select a

radio station.

Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

For details on the following operations, see the

corresponding pages.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.65)

• Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.69)

• Playing back iPod music (p.70)

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

(p.73)

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

(p.76)

• Listening to Internet radio (p.80)

• Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83)

• The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display

or web control (p.93) to control Zone2.

• AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the

main zone.

• The Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source

selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2

input with the web control (p.93) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8).

• To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2

input or use the party mode (p.91).

Caution

• To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2.

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

R. DE

MAIN/ZONE2

Input selection keys

En 91

■ Other operations for Zone2

The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled.

Adjusting the volume

Press VOLUME or MUTE.

Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE)

Press SCENE.

• To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene,

hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front

display.

Setting the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30

min, off).

Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Default

0.0 dB

Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance

a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel.

b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”.

c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ Enjoying the same source in multiple

rooms (party mode)

The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music

that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode,

stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this

function when you want to use main zone music as background

music for a house party.

Press PARTY.

Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or

off.

When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the

front display.

• If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.125) in

the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default).

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

MUS

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

BD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

SLEEP

VOLUME

MUTE

SCENE

PARTY

En 92

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

MEMORY

BLUETOOTH

USB

NET

You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as

shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut

numbers.

• You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.82).

• Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual

contents cannot be registered.

Registering an item

Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number.

Play back a song or a radio station to be registered.

Press MEMORY.

• To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use

numeric keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2.

To confirm the registration, press MEMORY.

Recalling a registered item

Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number.

Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET.

Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number

(01 to 40).

You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a

shortcut.

• “No Presets” appears when no items are registered.

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

• The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases.

– The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not

connected to the unit.

– The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not

connected to the network.

– The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of

service.

– The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location.

–A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

• When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS,

the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you

have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not

recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again.

Registering favorite items (shortcut)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

01:Empty

MemoryPreset

Shortcut number (flashes)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

02:Empty

MemoryPreset

“Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

01:USB

RecallPreset

Numeric keys

En 93

You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser.

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router.

• Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these

cases, configure the security software appropriately.

• To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby

mode, set “Network Standby” (p.95) to “On”.

• We recommend using one of the following web browsers.

– Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x

– Safari 7.x

Start the web browser.

Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser.

(Example)

• You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu.

• You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.95) to access the

web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of

the unit may change each time the unit is turned on.

• If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.122), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC

to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC,

refer to its instruction manual.

• If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way.

– Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the

screen.

• By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an

iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8).

Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control)

Web browser

Web control

Router The unit

Web control

(wired or wireless) (wired or wireless)

En 94

■ Top menu screen

1 CONTROL

Moves to the control screen for the selected zone.

2 STATUS

Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone.

3 SETTINGS

Moves to the settings screen.

4 PA RT Y M ODE

Turns on/off the party mode (p.91).

5 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on/off the power for all zones.

6 MAIN VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the

increments used for volume adjustment.

7 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

■ Control screen

1 PLAY INFO

Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone.

2 TOP MENU

Moves to the top menu screen.

3 SCENE

Selects a scene for the selected zone.

4 POWER

Turns on/off the power for the selected zone.

5 VOLUME

Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the

increments used for volume adjustment.

6 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

• Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used.

En 95

■ Settings screen

1 Rename

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.123) or the name of each zone

(p.124). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Network

Selects the network connection method (p.121) or configures the network parameters (such as

IP address) (p.121). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

AirPlay Password

Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.83). Click “APPLY” to apply the

changes to the unit.

MAC Filter

Sets the MAC address filter (p.122) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click

“APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit.

Auto Reload

Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control

screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds.

Network Standby

Enables/disables the network standby function (p.122).

Backup/Recovery

Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup.

Firmware Update

Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC.

Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update.

Create Link

Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen.

Tips

Displays tips for use of the web control.

Licenses

Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit.

2 BACK

Moves to the top menu screen.

3 RELOAD

Reloads the current status of the unit.

Note

• If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit.

• When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network

devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and

other external devices.

• Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the

settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific

information (such as MAC address and IP address).

• Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit.

En 96

Switching information on the front display

Press INFO.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for

the displayed item appears.

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed

item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

* The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio

decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears.

Viewing the status information on the TV

Press DISPLAY.

The following information is displayed on the TV.

To close the information display, press DISPLAY.

Viewing the current status

Input source group Item

AV 1–7

V-AUX

AUDIO 1–3

PHONO

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

TUNER

DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder

(decoder name*)

* (U.K. and Europe models only)

Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is

tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (

p.67

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

AudioDecoder

Info

Item name

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

†‡PLƒx¡MOVIE

¡¡¡¡AV1

Information

Bluetooth

USB

SERVER

AirPlay

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album

name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio

Decoder (decoder name*)

* During simple playback of iPod:

DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station

(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),

Audio Decoder (decoder name*)

Input source group Item

Input source/

Party mode

status

Audio format/

Decoder

Compressed Music Enhancer status

CINEMA DSP status

Sound

mode

Volume/

YPAO

Volume

status

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

RETURN

ENTE

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

INFO

DISPLAY

En 97

You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This

menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily

configure settings during playback.

Press OPTION.

Front display

TV screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

Option menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

• Default settings are underlined.

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSBPR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

SLEEP

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

ToneControl

Option

Item Function Page

Tone Control

(Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency

range of sounds.

YPAO Volume

(YPAO Volume)

YPAO Volume

(YPAO Vol.)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 98

Adaptive DRC

(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to

minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume

is adjusted.

Dialogue

(Dialog)

Dialogue Level

(Dialog Lvl)

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. 99

Dialogue Lift

(Dialog Lift)

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. 99

Subwoofer/Bass

(Subwoofer/Bass)

Subwoofer Trim

(SW.Trim)

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. 99

Extra Bass

(Extra Bass)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. 99

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enhancer

(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. 99

Hi-Res Mode

(HiRes Mode)

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for

enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital

audio).

100

Video Processing

(Video Process.)

Enables/disables the video signal processing

settings configured in the “Setup” menu.

100

Input Settings

(Input Settings)

Input Trim

(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources. 100

Audio Select

(A.Sel)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than

one audio connection is made for one input source.

100

Video Out

(V.Out)

Selects a video to be output with the audio input

source.

100

FM Mode

(FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio

reception.

100

En 98

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Choices

Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

Setting range

-6.0 dB to Bypass

(Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

• You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE

repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume)

Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC.

Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and

low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that

you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume.

Settings

• YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already

saved (p.39).

• We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower

volumes or at night.

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically

adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for

listening to playback at a low volume at night.

Settings

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide

at a high volume.

Traffic Program

(TrafficProgram)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Automatically searches for a traffic information

station.

Shuffle

(Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.72),

USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79).

—

Repeat

(Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.72),

USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79).

—

Item Function Page

YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.)

Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume.

On (On) Enables YPAO Volume.

Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is

enabled.

Volume: low Volume: high

Input level Input level

Off

Output level

En 99

■ Dialogue (Dialog)

Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds.

Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard

clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting.

Setting range

to 3

Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is

coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing

this setting.

• This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met.

– One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front

presence speakers are used.

– Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.60) is working.

(You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.)

Setting range

to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position)

■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass)

Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound.

Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy

enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the

presence or absence of the subwoofer.

Settings

■ Enhancer (Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode.

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

• Compressed Music Enhancer works on both the main zone and Zone 2.

• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer

(p.64).

Settings

Default

TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On)

Others: Off (Off)

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz.

Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl)

Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift)

Ideal position

Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)

Extra Bass (Extra Bass)

Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass.

On (On) Enables Extra Bass.

Enhancer (Enhancer)

Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

En 100

Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this

function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio

(such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer.

Settings

■ Video Processing (Video Process.)

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings

configured in “Processing” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu.

Settings

■ Input Settings (Input Settings)

Configures the input settings.

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume

differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.

Setting range

-6.0 dB to 0.0 dB

to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made

for one input source.

Settings

Selects a video to be output with the audio input source.

Settings

■ FM Mode (FM Mode)

Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception.

Settings

Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode)

On (On)

Enables the high-resolution mode.

(The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio

signal processing condition.)

Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode.

Direct

(Direct) Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

(Processing)

Enables the video signal processing.

Input Trim (In.Trim)

Audio Select (A.Sel)

Auto (Auto)

Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order.

1. HDMI input

2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL)

3. Analog input (AUDIO)

HDMI (HDMI)

Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals

are input through the HDMI jack.

Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt)

Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are

produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL

jack.

Analog (Analog)

Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when

no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks.

Video Out (V.Out)

Off (Off) Does not output video.

AV 1–7 (AV1–7),

V-AUX (V-AUX)

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

Stereo

(Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds.

Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds.

En 101

CONFIGURATIONS

You can change the input source settings using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured

and press the cursor key (q).

The input source of the unit also changes.

• You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Input menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.

• Default settings are underlined.

Configuring input sources (Input menu)

Item Function Page

Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 102

Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 102

Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via

AirPlay.

102

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media

Controller (DMC) to control playback.

102

En 102

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, USB

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w).

• You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Decoder Mode

Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”.

For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder

Mode” to “DTS”.

Input sources

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned)

Settings

■ Volume Interlock

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

Input sources

AirPlay

Settings

■ DMC Control

Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control

playback.

Input source

SERVER

Settings

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.

When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media

Player 12) on the same network.

Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal.

DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.)

Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range

(-80 dB to -20 dB and mute).

Full

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to

+16.5 dB and mute).

Disable Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable

Allows DMCs to control playback.

En 103

You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.57) using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and

press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Scene menu items

■ Save

Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the

selected scene.

• If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device

assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.58).

Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu)

Item Function Page

Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. 103

Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can

also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items

to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings

currently assigned to the selected scene.

104

Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 105

Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 105

En 104

■ Load

Loads the settings registered for the selected scene.

Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene

assignments.

Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected

to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback)

Settings

Default

SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control

SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off

• To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set

“HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152).

Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the

settings currently assigned to the selected scene.

To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item

and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude).

For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio

with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV)

and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO).

Choices

Default

Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected

Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected

Device Control

Off Disables the SCENE link playback function.

HDMI Control

Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if

an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is

connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports

HDMI Control.

Detail

Input Input (p.56), Audio Select (p.100)

HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.56)

Mode

DSP Program (p.59), Pure Direct Mode (p.118), Enhancer (p.64),

Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.100)

Sound

Tone Control (p.98), YPAO Volume (p.98), Adaptive DRC (p.98),

Extra Bass (p.99)

Surround

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.118), Dialogue Lift (p.99), Dialogue Level

(p.99), Subwoofer Trim (p.99)

Video Video Mode (p.119)

Volume Master Volume (p.56)

Lipsync Lipsync (p.117), Delay (p.117)

Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.113), PEQ Select (p.116)

Check or uncheck

En 105

■ Rename/Icon Select

Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen.

■ Setup procedure

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w).

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Reset

Restores the default settings (p.57) for the selected scene.

You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the

TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be

configured and press the cursor key (q).

• You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3.

Configuring sound programs/surround

decoders (DSP Program menu)

En 106

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

• To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

DSP Program menu items

• Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Settings for sound programs

Item Function Settings

Decode Type

Selects a surround decoder to be used

in combination with the selected sound

program.

bSurround*, bPLIIx Movie

(bPLII Movie), bPLIIx

Music* (bPLII Music*),

bPLIIx Game* (bPLII

Game*), Neo:6 Cinema,

Neo:6 Music*

(* Available only when

“SURROUND DECODER” is

selected)

DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level.

-6

to 0

to +3

Higher to enhance the sound

field effect, and lower to

reduce it.

Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and presence sound field

generation.

1 ms to 99 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Initial Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround sound field

generation.

1ms to 49ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Surround Back Initial

Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and surround back sound field

generation.

Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

presence sound field.

0.1 to 2.0

Higher to enhance the

broadening effect, and lower

to reduce it.

Surround Room Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround sound field.

Surround Back Room

Size

Adjusts the broadening effect of the

surround back sound field.

En 107

The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”.

• Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used.

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the presence sound

field.

0 to 10

Higher to enhance the

reflectivity, and lower to

reduce it.

Surround Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround sound

field.

Surround Back

Liveness

Adjusts the loss of the surround back

sound field.

Reverb Time

Adjust the decay time of the rear

reverberant sound.

1.0 s to 5.0 s

Higher to enrich the

reverberant sound and lower

to have clear sound.

Reverb Delay

Adjusts the delay between the direct

sound and reverberant sound

generation.

0 ms to 250 ms

Higher to enhance the delay

effect, and lower to reduce it.

Reverb Level

Adjusts the volume of the reverberant

sound.

0% to 100%

Higher to strengthen the

reverberant sound, and lower

to weaken it.

Item Function Settings

Sound program

Item Function Settings

2ch Stereo Direct

Selects whether to

automatically bypass the

DSP circuit when an

analog audio source is

played back.

Auto

, Off

7ch Stereo

Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0

to +5

Front / Rear Balance

Adjusts the front and rear

volume balance.

-5 to 0

to +5

Higher to enhance the front

side, and lower to enhance

the rear side.

Left / Right Balance

Adjusts the left and right

volume balance.

-5 to 0

to +5

Higher to enhance the right

side, and lower to enhance

the left side.

Height Balance

Adjust the height volume

balance using the front

presence speakers.

0 to 5

to 10

Higher to enhance the

upside, and lower to

enhance the downside. (The

front presence speakers do

not produce sounds when

“Height Balance” is set to

“0”.)

Monaural Mix

Enables/disables

monaural sound output.

Off

, On

En 108

■ Settings for decoders

The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND

DECODER” to “bSurround”, “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”.

Decode Type Item Function Settings

bSurround Center Spread

Selects whether to

spread the center

channel signals to left

and right when

2-channel source is

played.

Off

, On

Select “On” to spread center

channel signals to left and right if

you feel the center sound is too

strong when 2-channel source is

played.

bPLIIx Music

(bPLII Music)

Panorama

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the front sound

field.

Off

, On

Select “On” to wrap front left/right

channel sounds around the field

and generate a spacious sound

field in combination with the

surround sound field.

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening

effect of the center

sound field.

0 to 3

to 7

Higher to enhance the broadening

effect, and lower to reduce it

(closer to center).

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in

level between the front

and surround sound

fields.

-3 to 0

to +3

Higher to strengthen the front

sound field and lower to strengthen

the surround sound field.

Neo:6 Music Center Image

Adjusts the center

orientation level

(broadening effect) of

the front sound field.

0.0 to 0.3

to 1.0

Higher to strengthen the center

orientation level (less broadening

effect) and lower to weaken (more

broadening effect).

En 109

You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En 110

Setup menu items

Menu Item Function Page

Speaker

Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 39

Manual Setup

Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 113

Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 113

Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 113

Configuration

Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 114

Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 114

Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 114

Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 114

Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 114

Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 115

Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers. 115

Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 115

Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 115

Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 116

Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 116

En 111

Sound

Lipsync

Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 117

Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 117

Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 117

Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 117

Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 117

Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 118

Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 118

Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 118

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 118

Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 118

Object Decode Mode Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents. 118

Video Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 119

HDMI

HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 120

Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 120

Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 121

Network

Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 121

IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 121

Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 122

MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 122

Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 123

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Enables/disables the

Bluetooth

functions. 123

Audio Receive Disconnect Terminates the

Bluetooth

connection between the

Bluetooth

device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 69

Bluetooth Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from

Bluetooth

devices (

Bluetooth

standby). 123

Menu Item Function Page

En 112

Multi Zone

Main Zone Set Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 124

Zone2 Set

Vol ume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 124

Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 124

Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 125

Audio Delay Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing. 125

Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 125

Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 125

Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 125

HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 125

Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 125

Function

Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 126

Display Set

Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 126

Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the 11unit is operated. 126

Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 126

Trigger Output1

Trigger Output2

Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 127

Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 127

Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 127

ECO

Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 128

ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 128

Language Select an on-screen menu language. 128

Menu Item Function Page

En 113

Speaker (Manual Setup)

Configures the speaker settings manually.

• Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting.

• Default settings are underlined.

■ Setting Pattern

Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them.

When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in

the selected pattern.

• Measurement results (Auto Setup)

• Power Amp Assign

• Configuration

• Distance

• Level

• Parametric EQ

Settings

Pattern1

, Pattern2

• The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen.

• This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your

listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed,

you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them.

■ Setting Data Copy

Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction.

Choices

■ Power Amp Assign

Selects a speaker system.

The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2

subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room.

You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power

amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system.

Settings

■ Configuration

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm

(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”.

Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”.

Basic

Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to

7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.17).

7ch +1ZONE

Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone

and Zone2 speakers (p.24).

5ch BI-AMP

Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp

front speakers) (p.23).

5ch BI-AMP +SB

Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp

front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using an

external amplifier (p.24).

En 114

Selects the size of the front speakers.

Settings

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to

“Front”.

Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size.

Settings

Front

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency

components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components

lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Center

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency

components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.

The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

Surround

Large

Select this option for large speakers.

The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel

frequency components.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.

The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual

CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

Surround Back

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.

The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.

The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back

channel frequency components.

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

Small x2

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.

The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel

low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover

frequency (default: 80 Hz).

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.

The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio.

Front Presence

Large Select this option for large speakers.

Small

Select this option for small speakers.

None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected.

En 115

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase.

Settings

• When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase.

Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers.

Surround

Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”.

Front Presence

Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This

setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”.

• To play Dolby Atmos contents using the front presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout”

(p.19).

■ Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the

speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance

from “Meter” or “Feet”.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

0.30 m to 3.00

m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

■ Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

Choices

Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R,

Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer

Setting range

-10.0 dB to 0.0

dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

Subwoofer

Use

Normal

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not

reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect)

channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels.

Reverse

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed).

The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio

and low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers

will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and

low-frequency components from other channels.

Layout

Rear

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side

of the room.

Front

Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side

of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.62) works in this case.

Front Height

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the

front side wall.

Overhead

Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the

ceiling.

Dolby Enabled SP

Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front

presence speakers.

En 116

■ Parametric EQ

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Settings

• “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto

Setup” have already been saved (p.39). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results.

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER.

Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen.

Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER.

• To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”.

• To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.39) to the “Manual” fields for

fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands

(4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB

To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER

repeatedly to select an item.

Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected

band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and

the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain.

Setting range

Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer)

Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker

balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

Settings

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.

For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics.

YPAO:Front

Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the

front speakers.

YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound.

Through Does not use the equalizer.

Off Does not output test tones.

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance

or equalizer.

En 117

Sound

Configures the audio output settings.

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output.

Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3

Settings

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range

• Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on

the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”.

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual

Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when

“Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”.

Setting range

ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments)

• “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment.

■ Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and

DTS signals) playback.

Settings

■ Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5

Delay Enable

Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Enable

Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source.

Auto/Manual Select

Auto

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when

a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the

unit via HDMI.

If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in

“Adjustment”.

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video

and audio output manually.

Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Adjustment

Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Minimum/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low

volumes.

When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is

automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

En 118

■ Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.

Settings

■ Pure Direct Mode

Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.64).

Settings

■ Adaptive DSP Level

Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level.

Settings

■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP

3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo).

Settings

■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker

Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround

speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back

speakers are connected.

Settings

• VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back.

■ Object Decode Mode

Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos

contents.

Settings

• Regardless of this setting, object-based audio signals are played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio if any of

CINEMA DSP programs is selected.

Off

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered

standby mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max

Volume”.)

Auto

Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the

selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the

on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the

wall paper is displayed.

Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper.

Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically.

Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO

measurement results and the volume level.

Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.

Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS).

Disable

Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be

played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio.

Enable

Enables playback of object-based audio signals.

En 119

Video

Configures the video output settings.

■ Video Mode

Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio).

Settings

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to

reduce video output delay.

• When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not

displayed on the TV screen.

Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.133) in

the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be

displayed on your TV normally.)

Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to

“Processing”.

Settings

• This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i,

1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals.

Direct Disables the video signal processing.

Processing

Enables the video signal processing.

Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”.

Resolution

Through Does not convert the resolution.

Auto

Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution.

480p/576p, 720p,

1080i, 1080p, 4K

Output video signals with a selected resolution.

(Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.)

Aspect

Through Does not convert the aspect ratio.

16:9 Normal

Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side

of the screen.

En 120

HDMI

Configures the HDMI settings.

■ HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.152).

Settings

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152) after connecting HDMI

Control-compatible devices.

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI

Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio

when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

Settings

AUDIO 1–3

Default

AUDIO 1

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for

connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

Enables/disables ARC (p.154) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers

connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the

unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the

unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Settings

■ Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

• The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

• The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) is set to “Main”.

Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected

to the unit.

Settings

Off Disables HDMI Control.

Enables HDMI Control.

Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”.

TV Audio Input

ARC

Off Disables ARC.

Enables ARC.

Standby Sync

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the

unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Amp

Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones.

En 121

Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or

HDMI OUT 2 jack.

Settings

• The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on.

■ Standby Through

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the

unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input

selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in

standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Settings

Network

Configures the network settings.

■ Network Connection

Selects the network connection method.

Settings

■ IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

Select whether to use a DHCP server.

Settings

HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2

Off Disables the audio output from the TV.

On Enables the audio output from the TV.

Off

(This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.)

Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is

set to the power saving mode.

Wired

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a

commercially-available network cable (p.35)

Wireless (Wi-Fi)

Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via

the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see

“Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.48).

Wireless Direct

Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit

directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the

unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.54).

DHCP

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters

manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network

parameters (such as IP address).

En 122

■ Manual network settings

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys

(q/w) to select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Network Standby

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network

standby).

Settings

■ MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Settings

• AirPlay (p.83) and DMC (p.102) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter.

Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be

permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

■ Procedure

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address

6–10” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press

ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys

(q/w) to select a value.

To confirm the setting, press ENTER.

To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

IP Address Specifies an IP address.

Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Off Disables the network standby function.

Enables the network standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

Auto

Enables the network standby function.

(If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power

saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.)

Filter

Off Disables the MAC address filter.

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the

MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to

the unit.

MAC Address 1–10

En 123

■ Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network

devices.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Bluetooth

Configures the

Bluetooth

settings.

■ Bluetooth

Enables/disables the

Bluetooth

function (p.69).

Settings

■ Bluetooth Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from

Bluetooth

devices (

Bluetooth

standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns

on when a connect operation is performed on the

Bluetooth

device.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.122) is set to “Off”.

Off Disables the

Bluetooth

function.

Enables the

Bluetooth

function.

Off Disables the

Bluetooth

standby function.

Enables the

Bluetooth

standby function.

(The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.)

En 124

Multi Zone

Configures the multi zone settings.

■ Main Zone Set

Configures the main zone setting.

Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV

screen.

■ Procedure

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.

Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the

entry.

• To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”.

Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER.

• To restore the default setting, select “RESET”.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

■ Zone2 Set

Configures the Zone2 settings.

Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable

volume adjustments for Zone2.

Settings

• This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.113) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”.

Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Setting range

-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Zone Rename

Volume

Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Variable

Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output.

Max Volume

En 125

Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on.

Settings

• This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”.

Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing so that the audio is synchronized with the

video.

Setting range

ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments)

Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output.

Settings

Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen.

You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main

Zone Set” (p.124).

■ Monitor Out Assign

Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and

VIDEO) jacks are used.

Settings

Main

, Zone2

• To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video

monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from

the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

with a component video cable.

■ HDMI OUT2 Assign

Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used.

Settings

Main

, Zone2

• For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.152).

Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2

Assign” is set to “Zone2”.

■ Party Mode Set

Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.91).

Choice

Target: Zone2

Settings

Initial Volume

Off

Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby

mode.

Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB

increments).

(This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.)

Audio Delay

Mono

Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2.

On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2.

Zone Rename

Audio Output

On Enables the audio output.

Off

Disables the audio output (video output only).

Disable Disables switching to the party mode.

Enable

Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party

mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control.

En 126

Function

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

■ Input Assignment

Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input

source.

■ Procedure

Example: assigning the OPTICAL (b) jack to the input source “AV 2”

Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”,

and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys to select “b” and press ENTER.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

• You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source.

■ Display Set

Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display.

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

Setting range

-4 to 0

(higher to brighten)

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.128) is set to “On”.

Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is

operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment).

Settings

Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV.

Settings

Dimmer (Front Display)

Short Message

On Displays short messages on the TV screen.

Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen.

Wallpaper

Piano

Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

Gray

Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video

signal.

En 127

■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2

Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone

or input switching.

Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function.

Settings

Source

Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input,

switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”.

Choices

AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB

Settings

Manual

Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger

Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function

of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack.

Choices

Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized.

Settings

■ Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Settings

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

Trigger Mode

Power

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the

zone specified with “Target Zone”.

Source

The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in

the zone specified with “Target Zone”.

An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in

“Source.”

Manual

Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal

transmission with “Manual”.

Low

Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input

source specified in this option.

High

Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source

specified in this option.

Low Stops the electronic signal transmission.

High

Transmits the electronic signal.

Target Zone

Main

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone.

Zone2

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2.

All

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2.

When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission

is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2.

Off

Does not protect the settings.

On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

Icon

En 128

ECO

Configures the power supply settings.

■ Auto Power Standby

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if

no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into

standby mode.

Settings

Default

U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes

Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the

front display.

■ ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.

When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Settings

• The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted.

• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.

• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

Language

Select an on-screen menu language.

Settings

• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

20 Minutes

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and

no input signals are detected for 20 minutes.

2 Hours, 4 Hours,

8 Hours, 12 Hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for

the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit

will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

Off Disables the eco mode.

On Enables the eco mode.

English

Japanese

French

German

Spanish

Russian

Italian

Chinese

Français

Deutsch

Español

Italiano

En 129

You can view information about the unit using the TV screen.

Press ON SCREEN.

Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER.

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type.

To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN.

Types of information

■ Audio Signal

Displays information about the current audio signal.

• Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the

specifications and settings of the playback device.

■ Video Signal

Displays information about the current video signal.

■ HDMI Monitor

Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks.

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”.

Viewing information about the unit

(Information menu)

Input

Format Audio format of the input signal

Channel

The number of source channels in the input signal

(front/surround/LFE)

For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total

(3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE).

Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal

Output The speaker terminals from which signals are output

HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output

HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI)

Analog Resolution

Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT

jacks (analog)

Interface TV interface

Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV

En 130

■ Network

Displays the network information on the unit.

(When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

(When using Wireless Direct)

■ System

Displays the system information on the unit.

• If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of

the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You

can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating

the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.135).

■ Multi Zone

Displays information about Zone2.

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server

MAC Address (Ethernet)

MAC address

MAC Address (Wi-Fi)

vTuner ID vTuner ID

Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.123)

Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection

SSID

(When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection)

The SSID of the wireless network

SSID The SSID of the wireless network

Security Security method

Security Key Security key

IP Address IP address

Subnet Mask Subnet mask

MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address

Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication

Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.132)

TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.132)

Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.131)

Tuner Freq. Step

(Asia and General models only)

The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.132)

System ID System ID number

Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit

Input The input source selected for Zone2

Volume The volume for Zone2

En 131

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

Set the unit to standby mode.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE

Press PROGRAM to select an item.

Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on

again.

The new settings take effect.

ADVANCED SETUP menu items

• Default settings are underlined.

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.)

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the

speakers connected.

Settings

Configuring the system settings

(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT

PROGRAM

Item Function Page

SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 131

REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 132

REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 132

TUNER FRQ STEP

(Asia and General models only)

Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

132

TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 132

MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 133

4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format. 133

RECOV./BACKUP

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings

from the backup.

133

INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 133

FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 134

VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 134

6  MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You

can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

 MIN

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the

unit.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN

¡SPEAKER¡IMP.

En 132

Turning on/off the remote control sensor

(REMOTE SENSOR)

Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor

is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control.

Settings

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP)

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:

ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a

unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.

Settings

ID1

, ID2

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control

To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 (BD/DVD) together for

3 seconds.

To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 (TV) together for 3

seconds.

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting

(TUNER FRQ STEP)

(Asia and General models only)

Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or

region.

Settings

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV.

Settings

NTSC, PAL

Default

U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC

Other models: PAL

Turns on the remote control sensor.

OFF Turns off the remote control sensor.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ON

REMOTESENSOR

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

ID1

REMOTECONAMP

FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps

and AM by 10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps

and AM by 9-kHz steps.

OUT

ZONE

STEREO

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

FM50/AM9

TUNERFRQSTEP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

NTSC

TVFORMAT

En 133

Removing the limitation on HDMI video output

(MONITOR CHECK)

The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI

OUT jack.

Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution”

(p.119) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a

different resolution than the detected resolution.

Settings

• Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV

after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”.

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE)

Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz)

compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit.

Settings

• When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps.

Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP)

Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup.

■ Backup/recovery procedure

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO

to start the process.

Choices

Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE)

Restores the default settings for the unit.

Choices

YES

Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

resolution supported by the TV only.)

SKIP

Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a

specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.)

MODE 1

Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format.

(4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack)

Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not

be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”.

MODE 2

Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

YES

MONITORCHECK

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

MODE2

4KMODE

BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory.

RECOVERY

Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when

backup has been created).

Note

• Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored

correctly.

• The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords).

VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations.

ALL Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL Does not perform an initialization.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

BACKUP

RECOV./BACKUP

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

CANCEL

INITIALIZE

En 134

Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE)

New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be

released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit

is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For

details, refer to the information supplied with updates.

■ Firmware update procedure

Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure

you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to

start firmware update.

Choices

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after

ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in

“Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.135).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.130) in the “Information” menu.

• It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed.

USB Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK Update the firmware via the network.

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

USB

FIRMUPDATE

OUT

VOLUME

MUTE

DRCADAPTIVE

ZONE

SBLPL SBRSB PR

SW1

SW2SW

CL R

STEREO

ENHANCER

SLEEP

TUNED

PRE

AMP

PAR TY

ZONE

TAG

DOCK

SPIMP.-

x.xx

VERSION

En 135

New firmware that provides additional features or product

improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected

to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and

update it.

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.134).

A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed

after ON SCREEN is pressed.

Read the on-screen description.

To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to

select “START” and press ENTER.

The on-screen display turns off.

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”

appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z

on the front panel.

The firmware update is complete.

• If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation

mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a

message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.130). You can update the

unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen.

Updating the unit’s firmware via the network

Note

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during

firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more

(depending on your Internet connection speed).

• If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be

possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case,

update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.134).

• For details on update, visit the Yamaha website.

Information

icon

Message

System Icon

ENT

MEMORY

687

1234

MOVIE

ENHANCER

TUNING PRESET

BAND

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

TOP MENU

MUTE

PROGRAM

VOLUME

POP-UP/MENU

PURE DIRECT

STRAIGHT

INFO SLEEP

MUSIC

PARTY HDMI OUT

TUNER

BLUETOOTH

MAIN

ZONE 2

MODE

SCENE

4321

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADIO

AUDIO

5 6 7

V-AUX

1234

123

PHONO

SUR. DECODE

USB

NET

MEMORY

ENHAN

NIN

PRE

BAND

PLA

RETURN

REE

PTI

P MEN

MUTE

RAM

P-

MEN

RE DIRE

TRAI

INF

LEE

MUS

PARTY

HDMI

TUNER

MAIN

ZONE

TVBD/DVD

NET

RADI

AUX

R. DE

USB

NET

ENTER

Cursor keys

En 136

APPENDIX

The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound

balance...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to

optimize the speaker settings again (p.39). If you want to adjust the speaker settings

manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.113).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the

volume control...

If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the

volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or

speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum

volume level for the unit in advance (p.117). You can also set the maximum volume for

Zone2 (p.124).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning

on the unit...

By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically

applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the

volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.118). You can also set the initial

volume for Zone2 (p.125).

We are bothered by volume differences when switching

between input sources…

You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in

the “Option” menu (p.100).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at

all...

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152). After

connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,

enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This

setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your

system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback

devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during

operations...

By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated

(such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you

when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.126) in the

“Setup” menu to turn off the short messages.

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...

You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by

utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.127).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another

Yamaha product as well as the unit...

When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another

Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,

remote control (p.132).

I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device

even when the unit is in standby mode...

If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output

videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in

standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu

to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the

unit when this function is enabled.

Frequently asked questions

En 137

Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.

If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized

Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:

a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets

securely.

b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.

c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power, system and remote control

Troubleshooting

Problem Cause Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times

consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby

indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your

nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.21).

The unit enters standby mode automatically.

The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used

for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup”

menu to “Off” (p.128).

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.131).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short

circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and

speakers (p.21).

The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of

the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.128).

The unit is not reacting.

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric

shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop

in the power supply voltage.

Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to

initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable

from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.)

En 138

Audio

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote

control.

The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5).

The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or

strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

(China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only)

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in

orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.132).

Problem Cause Remedy

No sound.

Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio

format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume cannot be increased.

The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.117).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the

speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.116).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change

the speaker settings (p.113).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the

speaker volume (p.115).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be

malfunctioning.

En 139

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency

signals.

To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu

(p.116).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use”

(p.115).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

No sound from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from

the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.120).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is

used).

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the

speakers connected to the unit.

A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with

an HDMI cable.

Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.28).

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)

The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack

(p.120).

(If you are trying to use ARC)

ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.120). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

Only the front speakers work on multichannel

audio.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as

PCM) only.

To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). If necessary,

change the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

Noise/hum is heard.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The sound is distorted.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to

“Off” (p.128).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

The sound is interrupted.

If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI

audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due

to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.88).

Problem Cause Remedy

En 140

Video

Problem Cause Remedy

No video.

Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.133).

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is

defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

No video from the playback device (connected to

the unit with HDMI).

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video

Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). For information about video signals

supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.154).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both

the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2.

The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the

VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack.

To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the

playback device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.30).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over

the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with

an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.28).

Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

The video is interrupted.

(If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone)

Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected.

Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you

are using (p.56).

(If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2)

HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone

operations due to internal circuitry switching.

For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back

videos/audio” (p.88).

En 141

FM/AM radio

Problem Cause Remedy

FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio

reception (p.100).

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,

thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor

AM antenna.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Select the station manually (p.65).

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element

antenna.

The AM radio signal is weak.

Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Select the station manually (p.65).

Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with

the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as

presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations

manually (p.66).

En 142

Bluetooth

Problem Cause Remedy

A Bluetooth connection cannot be established.

The

Bluetooth

function of the unit is disabled. Enable the

Bluetooth

function (p.123).

Another

Bluetooth

device is already connected to the unit.

Terminate the current

Bluetooth

connection and then establish a new connection

(p.69).

The unit and the

Bluetooth

device are too far apart. Move the

Bluetooth

device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that

outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

The

Bluetooth

device does not support A2DP. Use a

Bluetooth

device that supports A2DP.

The connection information registered on the

Bluetooth

device is

not working for some reason.

Delete the connection information on the

Bluetooth

device, and then establish a

connection between the

Bluetooth

device and the unit again (p.69).

No sound is produced, or the sound is

interrupted during playback.

The volume of the

Bluetooth

device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the

Bluetooth

device.

The

Bluetooth

device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the

Bluetooth

device to the unit.

The

Bluetooth

connection has been terminated.

Establish a

Bluetooth

connection between the

Bluetooth

device and the unit again

(p.69).

The unit and the

Bluetooth

device are too far apart. Move the

Bluetooth

device closer to the unit.

There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that

outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby.

Move the unit away from those devices.

En 143

USB and network

Problem Cause Remedy

The unit does not detect the USB device.

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be

viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The files in the USB device cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained

properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”

menu to “On” on the unit (p.121). If you want to configure the network parameters

manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other

network devices in your network (p.121).

The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a

wireless router (access point).

The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router.

The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other.

There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router

(access point).

Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are

no obstacles between them.

Wireless network is not found.

Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood

might disturb the wireless communication.

Turn off these devices.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the

wireless router (access point).

Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point).

The unit does not detect the PC.

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music

contents are shared (p.76).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access

of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and the PC to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.122).

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played

back.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For

information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music

stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76).

The files in the PC cannot be played back

continuously.

Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder.

If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files)

during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files

in the playback folder.

En 144

The Internet radio cannot be played.

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have

been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting

silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try

the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your

network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be

played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.

The port number varies depending on the radio station.

The iPod does not recognize the unit when using

AirPlay.

The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router.

Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the

router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit.

The application for smartphone/tablet “AV

CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit.

The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the

unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network.

The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit.

In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or

specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the

unit (p.122).

Firmware update via the network is failed. It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.134).

Problem Cause Remedy

En 145

Error indications on the front display

Message Cause Remedy

Access denied Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared

(p.76).

Access error

The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.70).

There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.

Make sure your router and modem are turned on.

Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.35).

Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

No device

The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn

it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not

identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.132).

Remote Off

The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the

remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off.

Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the

“ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.132).

Unable to play

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for

some reasons.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some

reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be

defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some

reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the

formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). If

the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with

heavy traffic.

USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again.

En 146

Audio information

■ Audio decoding format

Dolby Atmos

Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the

Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces

audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically

throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the

introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener.

Dolby Atmos Stream

Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or

Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains

special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is

decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker

systems of every size and configuration.

Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX

Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby

Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus

Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems

that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Enabled Speaker

A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology

employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the

listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that

can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall

speaker system footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby

surround playback.

Dolby Pro Logic II

Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:

“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three

modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for

game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

Dolby Surround

Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1

content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional

speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or

products with Dolby speaker technology.

Dolby TrueHD

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a

high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super

Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448

MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB.

This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

DTS 96/24

DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This

format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital

Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES

DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This

decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a

surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a

discrete surround back channel is recorded.

DTS Express

DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher

compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is

developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports

7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the

existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on

BD (Blu-ray discs).

Glossary

En 147

DTS-HD Master Audio

DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home

theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to

eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This

technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6

DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music

mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete

full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

FLAC

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio

formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

MP3

One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this

compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data

quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC

An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming

services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality

than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)

PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This

technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called

Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit

Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal

is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.

• Sampling frequency

Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.

When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.

• Quantization bit

The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a

numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more

accurate.

WAV

Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by

converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other

compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)

One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic

technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of

compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others

Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)

A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification

connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a

consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel

This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This

channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio

effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

Lip sync

Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an

increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag

between audio and video output.

En 148

HDMI and video information

Component video signal

With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and

the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because

each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal

With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined

and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color

Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available

colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems

process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology

allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate

on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDCP

HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of

digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI).

HDMI

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video

signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable

without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a

secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at

“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color

“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than

sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with

the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,

natural images.

Network information

SSID

SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the

Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making

connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance

interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark.

WPS

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy

establishment of a wireless home network.

En 149

Yamaha technologies

CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)

Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is

best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions

(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are

differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,

Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own

home.

CINEMA DSP 3D

The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA

DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the

accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer

The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music

formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound

system.

SILENT CINEMA

Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for

headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound

programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with

front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual CINEMA FRONT

Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers

with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic

sound field in a listening room.

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS)

Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without

front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D

sound field in your room.

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS)

Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back

speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear

sound filed of CINEMA DSP.

En 150

■ Supported devices

❑ Bluetooth device

• The unit supports

Bluetooth

devices that support A2DP or AVRCP.

•A

Bluetooth

device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be

compatible, depending on the model.

❑ USB devices

• The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable

audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format.

• Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB

chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc.

• USB devices with encryption cannot be used.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of

the USB storage device.

❑ iPod

• An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible,

depending on the model or software version of the iPod.

❑ AirPlay

AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X

Mountain Lion or later and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later.

(as of May 2015)

■ File formats

❑ USB/PC (NAS)

* Linear PCM format only

• To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of

FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

• Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back.

Supported devices and file formats

Made for.

iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4,

iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G

iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation)

iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation)

(as of May 2015)

File

Sampling

frequency (kHz)

Quantization

bitrate (bit)

Bitrate

The number

of channels

Gapless

playback

WAV *

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24 — 2 ✔

MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —

WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —

MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 —

FLAC

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24 — 2 ✔

ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔

AIFF

32/44.1/48/88.2/96/

176.4/192

16/24 — 2 ✔

DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 — 2 —

En 151

Video signal flow

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are

output to a TV as shown below.

■ Video conversion table

• You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu.

• The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably.

HDMI HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

COMPONENT

VIDEO

HDMI

VIDEO VIDEO VIDEOVIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

m: Available

HDMI out COMPONENT VIDEO out

VIDEO

out

Resolution

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p 4K

480i/

576i

480p/

576p

720p 1080i 1080p

480i/

576i

HDMI in

480i/576i mmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm

720p mmmm

1080i mmmm

1080p/

50, 60 Hz

mmmm

1080p/24 Hz

4K m

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

480i/576i mmmmmmm

480p/576p mmmmm m

720p mmmm m

1080i mmmm m

1080p m

VIDEO in 480i/576i mmmmmm m

Video device The unit TV

HDMI outHDMI in

COMPONENT

VIDEO in

COMPONENT

VIDEO out

VIDEO outVIDEO in

En 152

Multi-zone output

■ Audio output

m: Available

*1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On)

*2 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input

source selected in the main zone is selected)

Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

*3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input

source selected in the main zone is selected)

*4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input

*5 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input with the web control (p.93)

or use the party mode (p.91).

■ Video output

m: Available

*6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

*7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2”

HDMI Control

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that

supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as

power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback

devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with

an HDMI cable.

For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.28) and “Connecting video

devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.30).

Operations available from the TV’s remote control

• Standby synchronization

• Volume control including mute

• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner

• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device

• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)

(Example)

Operations available from the unit’s remote control

• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene

selection (p.57)

• Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed)

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external

device operation keys

Using the unit’s

internal amplifier

(

p.25

)

Using an external amplifier (p.87)

Zone2 Out

EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks

HDMI OUT 2

(ZONE OUT) jack

(*1)

Digital audio (HDMI) m (*2) m (*2) m (*3)

Digital audio

(COAXIAL/OPTICAL)

m (*4) m (*4)

Analog audio (AUDIO) mm

USB (including iPod) (*5) mm

Network sources (*5) mm

TUNER mm

Zone2 Out

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6)

HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT)

jack (*7)

COMPONENT VIDEO

VIDEO

HDMI video m

Component video m

Composite video m

Information on HDMI

HDMI Control

Turn off the TV

The unit turns off

(standby)

HDMI Control

Playback device

also turns off

En 153

(Example)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after

connecting the TV and playback devices.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

Configure the settings of the unit.

a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

b Press ON SCREEN.

c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER.

d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”.

e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER.

f Use the cursor keys to select “On”.

g Press ON SCREEN.

Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI

Control-compatible BD/DVD players).

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and

playback devices.

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

Check the followings.

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.

If not, select the input source manually.

On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning

off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in

Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices

exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on

the TV.

• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works

more effectively.

• We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices.

HDMI Control

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

Turns on and displays

video from the playback

device

HDMI Control

Playback starts

DISPLAYRETURN

ENTER

SCREEN

OPTION

PLA

RETURN

PTI

ON SCREEN

Cursor keys

ENTER

En 154

Audio Return Channel (ARC)

ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video

signal to the TV.

Check the following after the HDMI Control settings.

Select a TV program with the TV remote control.

Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched

to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following:

– “ARC” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”.

– The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack

marked “ARC”) on the TV.

Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the

instruction manual for the TV.

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an

audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28).

• When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC.

• “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the

AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input

assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.58), you also need to change the input assignment for

SCENE (TV).

HDMI signal compatibility

Audio signals

Video signals

The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending

on the type of the DVD player.

• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction

manual for each device.

• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device

outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).

For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),

HD DVD

DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD

Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video

Bitstream

(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,

DTS-HD Master Audio,

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD

• VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• 576p/50 Hz

En 155

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

Reference diagram (rear panel)

HDMI OUT

ARC

(ZONE OUT)

HDMI

(1 BD/DVD)

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

(HDCP2.2)

AV 5 AV 6 AV 7

IN OUT

REMOTE

AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4

AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3

(2 TV)

(1 BD/DVD)

OPTICAL

COAXIAL COAXIAL

COAXIAL

PHONO

GND

AC IN

75Ω

ANTENNA

(

4 RADIO

)

OPTICAL

ZONE OUT

ZONE 2

SPEAKERS

CENTER FRONTSURROUND BACKSURROUND

BI–AMP

ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/

L R R RL L L

SINGLE

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND SUR. BACK

(SINGLE)

EXTRA SP

RS-232C

TRIGGER

OUT

12V 0.1A

MAX. TOTAL

NETWORK

( 3

NET

)

AV 1

COMPONENT VIDEO

AV 3

AV 2

MONITOR OUT/

ZONE OUT

WIRELESS

(HDCP2.2)

(U.S.A. model)

En 156

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby

Atmos, Dolby Surround, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D

symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under

license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, &

DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and

Rights Reserved.

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic

accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or

iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet

Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its

compliance with safety and regulatory standards.

Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may

affect wireless performance.

iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are

trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are registered trademarks

owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha

Corporation is under license.

Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK)

This receiver supports network connections.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the

United States and other countries.

x.v.Color™

“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered

Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

Windows™

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player

are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Android™ Google Play™

Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association.

The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi

Alliance.

The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi

Alliance.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.

Google Noto Fonts

Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”);

you may not use this file except in compliance with the License.

You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0

Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software

distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS,

WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either

express or implied.

See the License for the specific language governing permissions

and limitations under the License.

Trademarks

Explanations regarding GPL

This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some

sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and

redistribute this open-source code only. For information on

GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the

GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website

(http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/).

En 157

Input jacks

• Analog Audio

Audio x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX)

• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)

Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2)

Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 3)

•Video

Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX)

Component x 3 (AV 1–3)

• HDMI Input

HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX)

•Others

USB x 1 (USB2.0)

NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T)

Output jacks

• Analog Audio

- Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R

, CENTER,

SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R

)

*1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE,

BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)]

- Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

SURROUND BACK L/R)

- Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono)

- ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2)

- Headphone x 1

•Video

MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT

- Composite x 1

- Component x 1

• HDMI Output

HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*)

* barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2)

Other jacks

• YPAO MIC x 1

• REMOTE IN x 1

• REMOTE OUT x 1

• TRIGGER OUT x 2

• RS-232C x 1

HDMI

• HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC

(Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD

• Video Format (Repeater Mode)

-VGA

- 480i/60 Hz

- 576i/50 Hz

- 480p/60 Hz

- 576p/50 Hz

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

• Audio Format

-Dolby Atmos

-Dolby TrueHD

- Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital

- DTS-HD Master Audio

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

- DTS Express

-DTS

- DSD 2-ch to 6-ch

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

(HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible)

• Link Function: CEC supported

TUNER

• Analog Tuner

[U.K. and Europe models]

FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

[Other models]

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

USB

• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

• Current Supply Capacity: 1 A

Bluetooth

• Sink Function

Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet)

• Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device

•

Bluetooth

Version .................................................Ver. 2.1+EDR

• Supported Profile ................................................ A2DP, AVRCP

• Supported Codec .....................................................SBC, AAC

• Wireless Output

............................................. Bluetooth

Class 2

• Maximum Communication Distance .......................10 m (33 ft)

Network

• PC Client Function

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

• AirPlay supported

• Internet Radio

• WiFi function

- Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method

- Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection

and USB connection

- Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device

- Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed

Mode

- Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz

- Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n

Specifications

En 158

Compatible Decoding Formats

• Decoding Format

-Dolby Atmos

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

DTS Express

- DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1

- DTS Digital Surround

• Post Decoding Format

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic II Game

- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie,

Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game

- Dolby Surround

- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

Audio Section

• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 )

Front L/R ..........................................................120 W+120 W

Center .......................................................................... 120 W

Surround L/R....................................................120 W+120 W

Surround Back L/R ..........................................120 W+120 W

(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 )

Front L/R ..........................................................110 W+110 W

Center .......................................................................... 110 W

Surround L/R....................................................110 W+110 W

Surround Back L/R ..........................................110 W+110 W

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R ..........................................................120 W+120 W

Center .......................................................................... 120 W

Surround L/R....................................................120 W+120 W

Surround Back L/R ..........................................120 W+120 W

• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 )

Front L/R..................................................................140 W/ch

Center......................................................................140 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................140 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ..................................................140 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 )

Front L/R..................................................................135 W/ch

Center .....................................................................135 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................135 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ..................................................135 W/ch

(1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 )

Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models].......................170 W/ch

• Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven)

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 )

Front L/R..................................................................170 W/ch

Center......................................................................170 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................170 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ..................................................170 W/ch

(1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 )

Front L/R..................................................................165 W/ch

Center......................................................................165 W/ch

Surround L/R ...........................................................165 W/ch

Surround Back L/R ..................................................165 W/ch

• Dynamic Power (IHF)

Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W

• Damping Factor

Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more

• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance

PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 )................................ 3.5 mV/47 k

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k

• Maximum Input Signal

PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more

AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more

• Output Level / Output Impedance

PRE OUT

SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)......................................... 1.0 V/470 

Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)............................. 1.0 V/470 

ZONE OUT ............................................................. 1.0 V/470 

• Headphone Impedance....................................... 16  or more

• Frequency Response

AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB

• RIAA Equalization Deviation

PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB

• Total Harmonic Distortion

PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ........................... 0.04% or less

AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 55 W/ 8 )

............................................................................ 0.04% or less

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)

(Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out)

PHONO .............................................................. 95 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc..................................................... 110 dB or more

• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)

Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less

• Channel Separation

(Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

PHONO ....................................................75 dB/60 dB or more

AUDIO 2 etc.............................................75 dB/60 dB or more

• Volume Control

Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step)

En 159

• Tone Control Characteristics

Main Zone

Bass Boost/Cut.........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz

Zone2

Bass Boost/Cut.........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step)

Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz

Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step)

Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz

• Filter Characteristics

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small)

..................................................................................12 dB/oct.

L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.

Video Section

• Video Signal Type....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM

• Video Signal Level

Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Component

Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω

Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω

• Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more

• Signal to Noise Ratio ..........................................60 dB or more

• Monitor Out Frequency Response

Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT)

............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB

FM Section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz

[Asia and General models]

.......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz

[Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz

• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)

Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)

• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)

Mono/Stereo ..........................................................65 dB/64 dB

• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)

Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.5%/0.6%

• Antenna Input................................................75 Ω unbalanced

AM section

• Tuning Range

[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz

[Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz

[Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz

General

• Power Supply

[U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz

[General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

[China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz

[Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz

[Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz

[U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz

[Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz

• Power Consumption

[U.S.A. model].................................................................450 W

[Canada and Korea models]...........................................380 W

[Other models] ................................................................420 W

• Standby Power Consumption

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off

......................................................................................... 0.1 W

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),

Network Standby Off........................................................ 1.4 W

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On,

Bluetooth Standby Off

Wired............................................................................. 2.1 W

Wireless (Wi-Fi) ............................................................. 2.1 W

Wireless Direct .............................................................. 2.2 W

HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off,

Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On

......................................................................................... 1.9 W

HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals),

Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On

......................................................................................... 2.9 W

• Maximum Power Consumption

[Asia and General models]...........................................1190 W

• Dimensions (W x H x D)

......................435 x 182 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17-1/4”)

* Including legs and protrusions

• Reference Dimensions (W x H x D)

(with wireless antenna upright)

......................435 x 247 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 17-1/4”)

• Weight ...........................................................14.9 kg (32.8 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

En 160

Symbols

Exclamation mark (!) 130, 135

Lock icon (o) 127

Numerics

2.1-channel system 18

2ch Stereo 62

4K Ultra HD 154

5.1-channel system 18

7.1+2-channel system 17

7.1-channel system 17

7ch Stereo 62

Adaptive DRC 98

ADVANCED SETUP 131

AirPlay 83

AM radio 65

ARC (Audio Return Channel) 154

Audio Decoder (front display information) 96

Auto Power Standby 128

Auto Preset (FM radio) 68

Backup/recovery of the settings 133

Banana plug 21

Basic speaker configuration 17

Bluetooth 69

Bookmark 82

CINEMA DSP 60

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode 118

Compressed Music Enhancer 64

Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 39

Decoder Off (front display information) 96

Dialogue 99

, 129

Dimmer (Front Display) 126

DLNA 76

DMC (Digital Media Controller) 102

Dolby Atmos 17

, 38, 59, 118

DSP Program (front display information) 96

ECO 128

Error indication (front display) 145

External power amplifier 26

Extra Bass 99

Firmware update 131, 134

FM radio 65

Frequency step setting 65

, 132

Front display information 96

HDCP 139, 140

HDMI OUT2 Assign 125

HDMI output selection 56

HDMI signal compatibility 154

Initial Volume 118, 125

Input jack assignment 126

Input Trim 100

Internet radio 80

iPod content playback 70

iPod content playback (AirPlay) 83

Lipsync 147

MAC Address Filter 122

Max Volume 117

, 124

Memory Guard 127

Menu language selection 37

Multiple room playback 85

Muting 56

, 91

NAS content playback 77

Network Connection 121

Network information 130

Network Name 130

Network Standby 122

Option menu 97

Parametric EQ 116

Party mode 91

Power Amp Assign 113

Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) 66

Pure Direct 64

Radio Data System tuning 67

Remote control 14

Remote control ID 132

Rename 102

, 105, 123

Repeat 72

, 75, 79

Restoring the default settings 133

SCENE function 57

Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format 133

Setup menu 109

Short Message 126

Shuffle 72

, 75, 79

Signal information 129

Sleep timer 14

, 91

Sound program 60

, 61

Speaker impedance 16

, 20, 131

Standby Through 111

Index

En 161

Straight decode 63

Subwoofer Trim 99

Surround decoder 63

Test Tone 116

Tone Control 98

Trigger function 36

, 127

USB storage device content playback 73

Virtual CINEMA FRONT 18, 62

Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 17

Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 17

, 118

Wallpaper 126

Web control 93

Wireless (Wi-Fi) 48

, 121

Wireless Direct 54

, 121

WPS 50

YPAO

(Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) 39

YPAO Volume 98

Zone2 85, 124

Documenttranscriptie

AV Receiver Owner’s Manual Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit. English CONTENTS 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FEATURES 9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 6 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 39 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Useful applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Checking the measurement results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 PREPARATIONS Selecting the connection method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Connecting the unit to a wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 15 Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PLAYBACK 1 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 56 Basic speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Advanced speaker configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Selecting an HDMI output jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 2 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 3 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna . . . . 35 Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Connecting the network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Preparing the wireless antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 6 Connecting other devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 7 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Operating the radio on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 En 2 Playing back music via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 CONFIGURATIONS Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 101 Configuring input sources (Input menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Input menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Scene menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 DSP Program menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Speaker (Manual Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 Playback of Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 Playing back music with AirPlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Multi Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 Multi-zone configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Preparing Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Controlling Zone2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 Registering favorite items (shortcut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) . . . . . . . . . 129 Registering an item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Types of information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Recalling a registered item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . 131 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Viewing the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Viewing the status information on the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 En 3 APPENDIX 136 Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Power, system and remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Network information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Supported devices and file formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Multi-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Audio Return Channel (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 En 4 Accessories Operating range of the remote control Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product. • Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range shown below.  Remote control  Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2) Within 6 m (20 ft) 30° 30° Insert the batteries the right way round.  AM antenna  FM antenna • The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the U.S.A. model, unless otherwise specified. *One of the above is supplied depending on the region of purchase.  YPAO microphone • In this manual, illustrations of English menu screens are used as examples. • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) For information on how to control external devices with the remote control, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM.  Power cable • Some features are not available in certain regions. • Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice. • This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control. *The supplied power cable varies depending on the region of purchase. • This manual describes all the “iPod” and “iPhone” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to both “iPod” and “iPhone” unless otherwise specified.  CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)  Easy Setup Guide  Safety Brochure En 5 • indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations. • indicates supplementary explanations for better use. FEATURES What you can do with the unit Wide variety of supported content • Bluetooth . p.69 • iPod/iPhone . p.70 • USB . p.73 • Media server (PC/NAS) . p.76 • Internet radio . p.80 • AirPlay . p.83 Supports 2- to 7-channel (plus front presence) speaker system and up to 2 subwoofer connections. Allows you to enjoy favorite acoustic spaces in various styles. • Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.39 settings to suit your room (YPAO) • Reproducing stereo or multichannel . p.60 sounds with the sound fields like actual movie theaters and concert halls (CINEMA DSP) • Enjoying compressed music with . p.64 enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) Control Network contents Speakers iPod/iPhone/ Bluetooth device Audio • Bi-amp connections, channel expansion (with external power-amp) and multi-zone configurations to enhance your system . p.22 Audio USB device HDMI Control 4K Ultra HD signals and HDCP 2.2 supported Audio HDMI Control Audio/Video BD/DVD player Audio/Video TV AV receiver (the unit) Playback of Dolby Atmos contents supported Change the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) . p.17 . p.57 Sequential operation of a TV, AV receiver, and BD/DVD player (HDMI Control) TV remote control En 6 . p.152 Full of useful functions! Useful tips ❑ Connecting various devices (p.30) ❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.60) A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players), game consoles, camcorders, and other devices. Connecting front presence speakers allows you to create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your own room (CINEMA DSP 3D). Even when no front presence speakers are connected, the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function produces 3D surround sound. In addition, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field even when no surround back speakers are connected. ❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound with a single HDMI cable connection (Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.28) When using an ARC-compatible TV, you only need one HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals. I want to connect a playback device using HDMI for video and non-HDMI for audio... Use “Audio Select” in the “Option” menu to specify the type of an audio input jack to be used for the corresponding input source (p.100). Video and audio are not synchronized... Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay between video and audio output (p.117). I want to hear audio from the TV speakers... Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the output destination of signals input into the unit (p.120). Your TV speakers may be selected as an output destination. I want to get more bass sounds… HDMI Control TV audio Set “Extra Bass” in the “Option” menu to “On” to enjoy enhanced bass sounds (p.99). Video from external device I want to change the on-screen menu language... ❑ Various wireless connection methods (p.47) The unit supports the Wi-Fi feature that allows the unit to connect to your wireless router (access point) without a network cable connection. In addition, Wireless Direct enables connecting a mobile device to the unit directly without router. VSBS Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a language from English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese (p.37). I want to update the firmware... ❑ Surround playback with 5 speakers placed in front (p.62) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front and enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT). Use “FIRM UPDATE” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to update the unit’s firmware (p.134). If the unit is connected to the Internet, a message will be displayed on the TV when a firmware update is available (p.135). Many other settings are available that let you to customize the unit. For details, see the following pages. • Input settings (p.101) • SCENE settings (p.103) Wi-Fi or Wireless Direct ❑ Low power consumption (p.128) The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the unit’s power consumption. • Sound program and surround decoder settings (p.106) • Various function settings (p.110) • Information view (such as audio signal and video signal) (p.129) • System settings (p.131) En 7 Useful applications ■ AV CONTROLLER ■ AV SETUP GUIDE (for tablet) “AV CONTROLLER” will turn your smartphone/tablet into a Wi-Fi enabled remote control for your Yamaha network products. This application provides you the flexibility to control the available inputs, volume, mute, power commands and playback source. “AV SETUP GUIDE” is an application that assists you with cable connections between AV receiver and source devices as well as AV receiver setup. This application guides you through the various settings such as speaker connections, TV and video/audio device connections and selecting the speaker system. Functions • Power on/off and volume adjustment Functions • Input, scene and sound mode selection • Connection guide (speakers, TV and video/audio devices) • DSP Parameter adjustment • Playback control (including music selection for some sources) • For details, search for “AV CONTROLLER” on the App Store or Google Play. • Setup guide (YPAO settings and various setup assistance with illustrations) • Viewing owner’s manual • For details, search for “AV SETUP GUIDE” on the App Store or Google Play. En 8 Part names and functions Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 MAIN ZONE PURE DIRECT INPUT 6 1 MAIN ZONE z key Turns on/off (standby) the unit. 2 Standby indicator Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the following conditions. • HDMI Control is enabled (p.120) • Standby Through is enabled (p.121) • Network Standby is enabled (p.122) • Bluetooth Standby is enabled (p.123) • An iPod is being charged (p.70) VOLUME 7 8 5 PURE DIRECT key Enables/disables Pure Direct (p.64). • To use controls or jacks behind the front panel door, gently press the bottom of the door to open it. Keep the door closed when not using controls or jacks behind the front panel door. (Be careful not to trap your fingers.) 6 INPUT knob Selects an input source. 7 Front panel door For protecting controls and jacks (p.10). 8 VOLUME knob Adjusts the volume. 3 Front display Displays information (p.11). 4 Remote control sensor Receives remote control signals (p.5). En Opening the front panel door 9 ■ Inside of the front panel door 9 0 AB C ON SCREEN OPTION DE F GH SCENE TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT 1 2 3 IJ K INFO(WPS) MEMORY PRESET FM AM TUNING L 4 (CONNECT) MULTI ZONE PROGRAM ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES 5V M 9 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. 0 Menu operations keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. A OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.97). B DISPLAY key 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA N O VIDEO Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of output sounds (p.98). Adjusts the left/right channel volume balance for Zone2 (p.91). D STRAIGHT key Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.63). AUDIO R HDMI IN P E PROGRAM keys J FM and AM keys Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.59). F SCENE keys G MULTI ZONE keys ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL Switch between FM and AM (p.65). K PRESET keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.57). Displays status information on the TV (p.96). C TONE/BALANCE key L Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.66). Selects a USB/network content from shortcuts (p.92). L TUNING keys Select the radio frequency (p.65). Enables/disables the audio output to Zone2 (p.90). Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the keys and knobs on the front panel (p.90). H INFO (WPS) key M USB jack For connecting a USB storage device (p.73) or an iPod (p.70). N YPAO MIC jack For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.39). Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.96). Enters the wireless network connection setup (WPS push button configuration) by holding down for 3 seconds (p.50). O PHONES jack For connecting headphones. P VIDEO AUX jacks I MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.66). Registers USB/network contents as shortcuts (p.92). En 10 For connecting a device, such as a camcorder and a game console (p.33). Front display (indicators) 1 23 4 6 5 7 8 9 ECO MUTE VOLUME ZONE ZONE ZONE SLEEP 3 4 IN OUT 1 2 3 2 ENHANCER PARTY STEREO TUNED 3 0A B Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output. IN Lights up when HDMI signals are being input. OUT1/OUT2 Indicates the HDMI OUT jacks currently outputting an HDMI signal. 2 ECO Lights up when the unit is in the eco mode (p.128). 3 Signal strength indicator Indicates the strength of the wireless network signal (p.47). 4 ZONE2 Lights up when Zone2 is enabled (p.90). 5 SLEEP Lights up when the sleep timer is on. 6 Information display Displays the current status (such as input name and sound mode name). You can switch the information by pressing INFO (p.96). Blinks when audio is muted. FPL L C R FPR SL SW SR SBL SB SBR CD E 1 HDMI 7 MUTE ADAPTIVE DRC VIRTUAL EF 8 Volume indicator G E Cursor indicators Indicates the current volume. 9 VIRTUAL Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational. F ADAPTIVE DRC Lights up when the Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) or Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) (p.60), or the virtual surround processing (p.62) is working. 0 Bluetooth indicator Lights up when the unit is connecting to a Bluetooth device (p.69). A ENHANCER Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) is working. B CINEMA DSP Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.60) is working. “CINEMA DSP n” lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60) is activated. C STEREO Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal. TUNED Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station signal. D PARTY Lights up when the unit is in the party mode. (p.91) En 11 Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.98) is working. G Speaker indicators Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output. A Front speaker (L) S Front speaker (R) D Center speaker F Surround speaker (L) G Surround speaker (R) H Surround back speaker (L) J Surround back speaker (R) K Surround back speaker B Front presence speaker (L) N Front presence speaker (R) L Subwoofer Rear panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 : HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) 7 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ABC ( 3 NET ) D (U.S.A. model) WIRELESS AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 IN RS-232C OUT 2 (2 TV) A Y AV 1 ZONE OUT L PB PR Y PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK C AV 3 PB PR 1 2 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM SINGLE 1 PHONO jacks For connecting to a turntable (p.32). 2 AUDIO 1–3 jacks For connecting to audio playback devices and inputting audio signals (p.32). 3 AV 1–4 jacks For connecting to video/audio playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.30). 4 HDMI OUT 1 jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.28). When using ARC, TV audio signal can also be input through the HDMI OUT 1 jack. HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting video/audio signals (p.30), or for connecting to an HDMI-compatible device used in Zone2 (p.88). * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. 5 MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT component/composite video jacks For connecting to a TV that supports component or composite video and outputting video signals (p.29) or for connecting to a Zone2 video monitor (p.87). For connecting to a network with a network cable (p.35). A Wireless antenna For connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.47). B RS-232C terminal 6 HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and inputting video/audio signals (p.30). 7 COMPONENT VIDEO (AV 1–3) jacks For connecting to video playback devices that support component video and inputting video signals (p.31). 8 TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks For connecting to devices that support the trigger function (p.36). 9 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks For connecting to an infrared signal receiver/emitter that allows you to operate the unit and other devices from another room (p.89). En 0 NETWORK jack 12 This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. Consult your dealer for details. C VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) Selects the switch position according to your local voltage (p.36). D AC IN jack For connecting the supplied power cable (p.36). HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) (U.S.A. model) WIRELESS AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 IN RS-232C OUT 2 (2 TV) A Y AV 1 ZONE OUT L PB PR Y PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK C AV 3 PB PR 1 2 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL FRONT SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM SINGLE E F E ANTENNA jacks For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.34). F ZONE OUT jacks For connecting to the external amplifier used in Zone2 and for outputting audio (p.87). G H G SPEAKERS terminals For connecting to speakers (p.16). H PRE OUT jacks For connecting to a subwoofer with built-in amplifier (p.20) or to an external power amplifier (p.26). En 13 * The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. Remote control 1 Remote control signal transmitter 1 Transmits infrared signals. 2 z (receiver power) key 2 Turns on/off (standby) the unit. AV 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 5 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 6 PROGRAM 7 TOP MENU 8 VOLUME MUTE POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION 9 B C D E F G H I J ENTER DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Select an input source for playback. AV 1–7 AV 1–7 jacks V-AUX VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) AUDIO 1–3 AUDIO 1–3 jacks PHONO PHONO jacks TUNER FM/AM radio BLUETOOTH Bluetooth connection (the unit as a Bluetooth receiver) USB USB jack (on the front panel) NET NETWORK sources (press repeatedly to select a desired network source) 4 MAIN/ZONE2 switch Changes the zone (main zone or Zone2) that is controlled by the remote control (p.90). 5 SCENE keys Select the registered input source, sound program, and various settings with one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode (p.57). MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT K Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (p.65). BAND Switches between FM and AM radio. PRESET Select a preset station. TUNING Select the radio frequency. External device operation keys Let you perform playback operations when “USB” or “NET” is selected as the input source, or control playback of the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.152). B Sound mode keys Select a sound mode (p.59). C INFO key Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.96). D SLEEP key Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). E Numeric keys Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies. MEMORY key Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets (p.66). F HDMI OUT key 6 PROGRAM keys RETURN : A 3 Input selection keys A Radio keys Select a sound program (p.59). 7 External device operation keys Displays menus for the HDMI Control-compatible playback device (p.152). Selects HDMI OUT jacks to be used for video/audio output (p.56). G PARTY key Turns on/off the party mode (p.91). H VOLUME keys 8 ON SCREEN key Displays the on-screen menu on the TV. Adjust the volume. I MUTE key 9 Menu operation keys Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter. ENTER Confirms a selected item. RETURN Returns to the previous screen. 0 MODE key Mutes the audio output. J OPTION key Displays the option menu (p.97). K DISPLAY key Switches the iPod operation modes (p.72). Displays status information on the TV (p.96). • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) For information on the keys other than those above, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. (U.S.A. model) En 14 PREPARATIONS General setup procedure 1 Connecting speakers (p.16) Basic speaker configuration (p.17) Select the speaker layout and connect the speakers to the unit. Advanced speaker configuration (p.22) Apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance the system. 2 Connecting a TV (p.28) Connect a TV to the unit. 3 Connecting playback devices (p.30) Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit. 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.34) Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. 5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna (p.35) Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. 6 Connecting other devices (p.36) Connect external devices such as devices compatible with the trigger function. 7 Connecting the power cable (p.36) After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable. 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language (p.37) Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English). 9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings (p.38) According to your speaker configuration, you need to configure some speaker settings manually before performing YPAO. 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) (p.39) Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room (YPAO). 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly (p.47) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit! En 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 Connecting speakers The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system (p.22). Caution • Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.20). Ideal speaker layout Functions of each speaker Speaker type Abbr. Front (L) 1 Function Front (R) 2 Center 3 Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogues and vocals). Surround (L) 4 Surround (R) 5 Produce surround left/right channel sounds. Surround speakers also produce surround back channel sounds when no surround back speakers are connected. Surround back (L) 6 E Produce front left/right channel sounds (stereo sounds). 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 7 Front presence (L) E Front presence (R) R Subwoofer 9 1 9 Produce surround back left/right channel sounds. Surround back (R) R 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1.6 to 3.3 ft) 1.8 m (5.9 ft) 2 3 9 Produce CINEMA DSP effect sounds. In combination with CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60), the front presence speakers create a natural 3-dimensional sound field in your room. 4 Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces bass parts of other channels. This channel is counted as “0.1”. You can connect 2 subwoofers to the unit and place them on the left/right (or front/rear) sides of the room. 5 10°~30° 10°~30° 6 7 0.3 m (1 ft) or more • We recommend using front presence speakers to have a full effect of the 3-dimensional sound fields. However, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce 3-dimensional sound fields even when no front presence speakers are connected (p.60). • Use “Ideal speaker layout” (diagram on the right) as reference. You do not need to exactly adjust the speaker layout to this diagram since the YPAO function of the unit will automatically optimize the speaker settings (such as distances) to suit the speaker layout. • When using only one surround back speaker, place it straight behind the listening position (middle of “SBL” and “SBR” in the diagram). En 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Basic speaker configuration ■ Placing speakers in your room ❑ 7.1-channel system [★5.1.2] (using front presence speakers) Depending on the number of speakers, place the speakers and subwoofer in your room. This section describes the representative speaker layout examples. • To play back Dolby Atmos contents, apply a speaker system with a ★ mark. • (About the number of channels) For example, “5.1.2” denotes “standard 5.1-channel plus 2 for overhead speaker channels”. For details on how to place overhead speakers (presence speakers), see “Presence speaker layout” (p.19). ❑ 7.1+2-channel system [★5.1.2] (using both surround back and front presence speakers) This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. ❑ 7.1-channel system [★7.1.0] (using surround back speakers) This speaker system brings out the full performance of the unit and allows you to enjoy a highly-natural 3-dimensional sound field with any contents. • The surround back speakers and front presence speakers do not produce sounds simultaneously. The unit automatically changes the speakers to be used, depending on the selected CINEMA DSP (p.60). This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also allows you to enjoy extended surround sounds using the surround back speakers. En 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ 5.1-channel system ❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using front presence speakers) E R 1 9 This speaker system creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center and surround speakers to produce a 3-dimensional sound field, and also creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. This system is suited for enjoying not only 5.1-channel but also for 7.1-channel contents. 2 3 This speaker system uses the front presence speakers to produce a natural 3-dimensional sound field, and creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). ❑ 2.1-channel system ❑ Front 5.1-channel system (using surround speakers) 1 2 4 9 5 3 Even when no surround speakers are connected, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers using the front speakers to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA DSP). Even when surround speakers are placed in the front side, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) when “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”. • Add the center speaker to configure a 3.1-channel system. • You can enjoy surround sound even without the center speaker (front 4.1-channel system). En 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ Presence speaker layout Dolby Enabled SP The unit provides three layout patterns for presence speakers (Front Height, Overhead and Dolby Enabled SP). Choose a layout pattern that suits your listening environment. Use the Dolby Enabled speakers as the presence speakers. It utilizes sounds reflected from ceiling and lets you enjoy overhead sounds only from speakers that are placed at the same level as traditional speakers. • You can enjoy Dolby Atmos or Cinema DSP 3D with any layout pattern. Front Height Install the presence speakers on the front side wall. It delivers a natural sound field with excellent linkage of left, right, top and bottom sound spaces, and sound extensity effectively. • Place the Dolby Enabled speakers on top of or near the traditional front speakers. A Dolby Enabled speaker unit may be integrated into a traditional speaker. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the Dolby Enabled speakers. Notes on installation of ceiling speakers When installing presence speakers to a ceiling, install them just above the listening position, or the ceiling between the extensions of the front speakers and listening position. Overhead Install the presence speakers to the ceiling above the listening position. It delivers realistic overhead sound effects and sound field with excellent linkage of front and rear sound spaces effectively. FPR SR FR SBR C SBL FL FPL • For details on the installation position of ceiling speakers, see “Notes on installation of ceiling speakers” (p.19). En 19 SL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Connecting speakers Caution Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit. • Be sure to use speakers that are made for ceiling use and take anti-drop measures. Ask a qualified contractor or dealer personnel for installation works. Caution ■ Setting the speaker impedance • Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers. Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When using a 6-ohm speaker for any channel, set the speaker impedance to “6  MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. 1 2 Speakers to be connected Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet. Room Abbr. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. 7+2 7 5 2 Front (L) 1 ● ● ● ● MAIN ZONE z Front (R) 2 ● ● ● ● Center 3 ● ● ● Surround (L) 4 ● ● *3 Surround (R) 5 ● ● *3 Surround back (L) 6 ● *1 Surround back (R) 7 ● *1 Front presence (L) E ● *2 *4 Front presence (R) R ● *2 *4 STRAIGHT Main zone 3 Check that “SPEAKER IMP.” is displayed on the front display. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 4 5 Speaker system (the number of channels) Speaker type ¡SPEAKER¡IMP. ¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Press STRAIGHT to select “6  MIN”. Power Amp Assign (p.113) Basic (default) If you have seven speakers, use two of them as surround back speakers (*1) or front presence speakers (*2). Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and remove the power cable from the AC wall outlet. If you have five speakers, use two of them as surround speakers (*3) or front presence speakers (*4). You are now ready to connect the speakers. • You can also connect up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to the unit. • To use an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to enhance speaker output, see “Connecting an external power amplifier” (p.26). En 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Cables necessary for connection (commercially available) ❑ Connecting speaker cables Speaker cables (x the number of speakers) Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal. + – + – Audio pin cable (two for connecting two subwoofers) a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from the ends of the speaker cable, and twist the bare wires of the cable firmly together. Connection diagram b Loosen the speaker terminal. Refer to the following diagram and connect the speakers to the unit. c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side (upper right or bottom left) of the terminal. PRE OUT ZONE OUT (SINGLE) 1 d Tighten the terminal. 2 The unit (rear) ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L + (red) + b FR c ON T - a d SINGLE – (black) Using a banana plug (U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only) a Tighten the speaker terminal. E b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal. R 1 a 2 Banana plug 9 3 9 4 + FR ON T b ❑ Connecting the subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) 5 Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer. 6 7 Audio pin cable PRE OUT (SING LE) 1 2 SURR UND SUR. BACK SUBW OOFE R SURR OUN D BA CK CENT ER L • When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). En 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Advanced speaker configuration In addition to the basic speaker configuration (p.17), the unit also allows you to apply the following speaker configurations to enhance your system. Using the four internal amplifiers for front speakers to have more high-quality sounds Bi-amp connection Combining with an external power amplifier (Hi-Fi amplifier, etc.) to build an extended system Using the excess internal amplifiers for stereo speakers in another room Power-amp channel expansion (Example) Multi-zone configuration (Example) (Example) External power amplifier Bi-amp connection Zone2 Main zone En 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Available speaker configurations ❑ 5ch BI-AMP Main zone Output channel (max) Bi-amp 5  7  7 Bi-amp External power amplifier (required) Multi-zone Surround back +1 (Zone2) Power Amp Assign (p.113) Page 5ch BI-AMP 23 5ch BI-AMP +SB 24 7ch +1ZONE 24 1 9 4 2 3 9 5 • When applying one of these configurations, you need to configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu (p.38). Speaker En 23 Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection) 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 67 (not used) ER (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ 5ch BI-AMP +SB ❑ 7ch +1ZONE Bi-amp 1 9 1 2 3 9 9 4 1 5 6 7 2 9 3 4 5 6 2 7 Zone2 Main zone via external amp Speaker Connect to Speaker Connect to 12 FRONT and EXTRA SP (bi-amp connection) 12 FRONT 3 CENTER 3 CENTER 45 SURROUND 45 SURROUND 67 SUR.BACK (PRE OUT) via external power amplifier 67 SURROUND BACK ER (not used) ER (not used) 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 9 SUBWOOFER 1–2 Zone2 speakers EXTRA SP • When Zone2 output is enabled (p.90), the surround back speakers in the main zone do not output sound. En 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections ■ Connecting Zone2 speakers When using front speakers that support bi-amp connections, connect them to the FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals. When using Zone2 speakers, connect them to the EXTRA SP terminals. To utilize the EXTRA SP terminals for Zone2 speakers, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.38). To enable the bi-amp function, configure the “Power Amp Assign” setting in the “Setup” menu after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet (p.38). The unit (rear) The unit (rear) SPEAKERS SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT R L SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK 1 1 9 2 2 L CENTER R FRONT L 3 FL 5 6 9 FR 9 4 3 4 ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP SINGLE SINGLE 9 L 7 Zone2 5 Main zone • You can also connect Zone2 speakers using an external amplifier (p.87). • The FRONT terminals and EXTRA SP terminals output the same signals. Caution • Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. En 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Connecting an external power amplifier (Example) Connecting front speakers via an external power amplifier When connecting an external power amplifier to enhance speaker output, connect the input jacks of the power amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks of the unit. The same channel signals are output from the PRE OUT jacks as from their corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. PRE OUT (FRONT) jacks HDMI (HDCP2.2) V2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AV 7 Main input jack R OUT/ OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 Caution REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL IN 2 A Y AV 1 • To prevent the generation of loud noises or abnormal sounds, make sure the followings before making connections. PB PRE OUT PR Y (SINGLE) C AV 3 PB RS-232C MAIN IN OUT PR PR 1 L L 2 – Remove the power cable of the unit and turn off the external power amplifier before connecting them. FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER R SPEAKERS ROUND L R SURROUND BACK L – When using the PRE OUT jacks, do not connect speakers to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L FRONT – When using a pre-main amplifier that does not have the volume control bypass, turn up the volume of the pre-main amplifier enough and fix it. In this case, do not connect other devices (except the unit) to the pre-main amplifier. CENTER R R FRONT L SUR Amplifier with volume control bypass (such as A-S3000) SINGLE The unit (rear) The unit (rear) HDMI (HDCP2.2) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) AC IN MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL IN RS-232C OUT 2 A Y AV 1 PB PRE OUT ZONE OUT PR Y (SINGLE) C AV 3 PB PR 1 2 ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L SINGLE 1 23 4 About external power amplifiers 1 FRONT jacks We recommend using power amplifiers that meet the following conditions. Output front channel sounds. • With unbalanced inputs 2 SURROUND jacks • With volume control bypass (or without volume control circuit) Output surround channel sounds. • Output power: 100 W or more (6 to 8 ) 3 SUR. BACK jacks Output surround back channel sounds. When using only one surround back speaker, connect the external amplifier to the SINGLE jack (L side). 4 CENTER jack Outputs center channel sounds. En 26 Input/output jacks and cables ■ Video/audio jacks ■ Video jacks ■ Audio jacks ❑ HDMI jacks ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ❑ OPTICAL jacks Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single jack. Use an HDMI cable. Transmit video signals separated into three components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB), and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video cable with three plugs. Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before using the cable. AV 1 HDMI cable Digital optical cable Component video cable A • Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality degradation. • The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K Ultra HD video transmission features. • Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K Ultra HD videos. Y AV 1 PR PB ❑ COAXIAL jacks Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial cable. ❑ VIDEO jacks Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable. Digital coaxial cable AV 1 Video pin cable ❑ AUDIO jacks Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin cable (RCA cable). Stereo pin cable En 27 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 Connecting a TV Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV. About Audio Return Channel (ARC) You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit. • ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways. If you connect a TV that supports ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit. To maximize the performance of the unit, we recommend connecting a TV with an HDMI cable. • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. ■ HDMI connection ■ Component/composite video connection Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable). When connecting any video device with a component video cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks. When connecting any video device with a video pin cable, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack. • You can connect another TV or a projector by using the HDMI OUT 2 jack (p.30). HDMI OUT jack The unit (rear) HDM HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) AV 1 1 AV 3 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 2 AV 2 (HDCP2.2) 1 HDMI input ARC HDMI AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT • If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to the TV. HDMI OUT (ZONE OUT) • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. PB Y HDMI PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 (2 TV) A Y AUDIO 1 L AV 1 ZONE OUT PB PRE OUT (S SURROUND SU HDMI (2 TV) • If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box, you do not need to make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit. R AUDIO GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL R FRONT SURROUND L L R L L R R ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM R TV 1 OPTICAL OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) • You do not make an audio cable connection between the TV and the unit in the following cases: – If your TV supports Audio Return Channel (ARC) – If you will receive TV broadcasts only from the set-top box • If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s power and volume with the TV’s remote control. To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the HDMI settings on the unit. For details on the settings, see “Information on HDMI” (p.152). En 28 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable) ❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable) The unit (rear) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) The unit (rear) HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) HONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COM Y PR AV B A AV 1 PB PRE OUT ZONE OUT MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PR Y 2 OPTICAL (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) AV 3 AV 4 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 2 AV 4 VIDEO MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y PR (SINGLE) PB Y C AV 1 2 1 OPTICAL MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks AV 1 1 AUDIO 3 (2 TV) Y GND (HDCP2.2) 2 Video input (composite video) HDMI (HDCP2 HDMI OUT AV 1 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 R FRONT SURROUND L SURROUND SUR. BACK R SUBWOOFER PR V Video input (component video) PR PB PHONO AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 (2 TV) A Y AUDIO 1 L COMPONENT VIDEO Y AUDIO 1 Y PB PB PRE OUT PR (SINGLE) AUDIO R PR GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL R ANTENNA (4 RADIO) FM AV 1 ZONE OUT (2 TV) SURROUND BACK PR 75Ω V AM PB FRONT SURROUND L SURROUND L SUR. BACK R SURROU L L R R ANTENNA (4 RADIO) AUDIO 1 Y (2 TV) 75Ω FM SING AM R TV AUDIO L L L R R 1 OPTICAL OPTICAL R O TV 1 OPTICAL AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks OPTICAL O AUDIO 1 (OPTICAL or AUDIO) jacks O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) En 29 O Audio output (digital optical or analog stereo) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Connecting another TV or a projector 3 Connecting playback devices The unit has two HDMI output jacks. If you connect another TV or a projector to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can switch the TV (or projector) to be used for watching videos with the remote control (p.56). The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages. • Connecting an iPod (p.70) HDMI HDMI OUT 2 jack • Connecting a USB storage device (p.73) HDMI OUT The unit (rear) (HDCP2.2) 2 1 (ZONE OUT) ARC TV Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 1 AV 3 AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack. Y AUDIO 3 (2 TV) A Y AV ZONE OUT L HDMI R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 R HDMI input FRONT SURROUND L HDMI • Videos input to the unit via HDMI cannot be output to a TV connected to the unit with a cable other than HDMI. For details, refer to “Video signal flow” (p.151). ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM TV (already connected) • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COMPONENT VIDEO (A , B , C ), COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source. Projector • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.100) in the “Option” menu. • HDMI Control is not available on the HDMI OUT 2 jack. • If you set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”, you can connect a video monitor for Zone2 to the HDMI OUT 2 jack and enjoy videos and audio using the video monitor (p.88). ■ HDMI connection Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable. HDMI (AV 1–7) jacks The unit (rear) HDMI (HDCP2.2) I OUT CP2.2) 1 AV 3 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 N AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 HDMI output REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL IN OUT 2 A Y AV 1 PB PRE OUT ZONE OUT PR Y (SINGLE) C AV 3 PB PR HDMI HDMI 2 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK HDMI 1 SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L SINGLE ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER Video device If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–7 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. En 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ■ Component video connection ■ Composite video connection Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device. Output jacks on video device Output jacks on video device Input jacks on the unit Video Input jacks on the unit Audio Video Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO + AUDIO) Component video Audio Composite video AV 1–3 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (VIDEO + COAXIAL) Digital optical AV 3 (VIDEO + OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (VIDEO + AUDIO) The unit (rear) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) Y The unit (rear) PB PR PR AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) 1 AV 1 AV 1–4 (VIDEO) jacks (1 BD/DVD ARC AV 3 AV 4 Video output (composite video) PB HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 PHONO Y AV 6 AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 V (2 TV) (1 BD/DVD) ARC ZONE L AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGE OUT PR VIDEO R B 1 Video output (component video) 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 2 (2 TV) A Y AV 1 ZONE OUT L PB PR Y PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK C AV 3 PB PR GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 V R 1 ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 2 R PR GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER SPEAKERS SURROUND R L R SURROUND BACK Y PB 75Ω PR FM AM CENTER L PB ZONE 2/F.PRESEN R BI–AMP EXTRA SP C C Y COAXIAL ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM O C C L SINGLE COAXIAL O Video device Video device O L L R R OPTICAL O R L L L R R OPTICAL Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3 (OPTICAL), AV 1–4 (AUDIO) jacks R Any of AV 1–2 (COAXIAL), AV 3 (OPTICAL), AV 1–3 (AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–3 on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the video device will be output from the unit. En 31 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) PHONO jacks Audio output (PHONO) PHONO Connect audio devices such as CD players, MD players, and a turntable to the unit. Depending on the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following connections. PHONO L L L L R R R R • The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “Input Assignment” setting (p.126) in the “Setup” menu. As necessary, you can assign the COAXIAL (c, d, e) and OPTICAL (a, b, f) jacks to another input source. Ground lead GND GND HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) • If you make more than one audio connection for one input source, an audio signal played back on the unit will be determined according to the “Audio Select” setting (p.100) in the “Option” menu. PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 1 Audio output jacks on the unit Digital coaxial AV 1–2 (COAXIAL) AUDIO 3 (COAXIAL) AV 2 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT Turntable Y AUDIO 3 (2 TV) A Y AV ZONE OUT L Audio output jacks on audio device AV 1 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL ZONE 2 6 OPTICAL R FRONT SURROUND L ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω Digital optical AV 3 (OPTICAL) AUDIO 1–2 (OPTICAL) Analog stereo AV 1–4 (AUDIO) AUDIO 1–3 (AUDIO) FM AM C C COAXIAL Turntable (PHONO) O The unit (rear) PHONO Audio device O L L L R R OPTICAL R Any of AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3 (COAXIAL, OPTICAL, AUDIO) jacks Audio output (any of digital coaxial, digital optical, analog stereo) If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3 or PHONO on the remote control, the audio played back on the audio device will be output from the unit. When connecting a turntable • The PHONO jack of the unit is compatible with an MM cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use a boosting transformer. • Connecting the turntable to the GND terminal of the unit may reduce noise in the signal. En 32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Connecting to the jacks on the front panel ❑ Composite video/analog stereo connection Use the VIDEO AUX jack to temporarily connect a playback device to the unit. Connect a playback device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with a video pin cable and a stereo pin cable. Use the USB jack to connect an iPod or a USB storage device. For details, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.70) or “Connecting a USB storage device” (p.73). (CONNECT) MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM TUNING ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on the unit. ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES ❑ HDMI connection 5V Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as game consoles and camcorders) to the unit with an HDMI cable. 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L V L AUDIO R HDMI IN R The unit (front) (CONNECT) MULTI ZONE PROGRAM FM AM TUNING ENTER ZONE 2 RETURN ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES 5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R HDMI IN HDMI The unit (front) Game console Camcorder Game console If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • If you connect video devices to both the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks, the unit outputs video/audio input through the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack. Camcorder If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX on the remote control, the video/audio played back on the device will be output from the unit. • To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the unit (p.28). • You need to prepare an HDMI cable that matches the output jacks on your device. • The VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack does not support HDCP 2.2. En 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 4 Connecting the FM/AM antennas Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit. Assembling the AM antenna Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface. FM antenna AM antenna HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 RE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 IN 2 (2 TV) A Y AV 1 ZONE OUT L PB PR Y PRE OUT (SINGLE) SURROUND SUR. BACK C AV 3 PB PR 1 2 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 FRONT SUBWOOFER Connecting the AM antenna CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L Hold down ANTENNA Insert Release (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM SINGLE The unit (rear) • Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit. • The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity. En 34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 Connecting a network cable or preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to a router (access point) with a network cable, or prepare the wireless antenna for establishing a wireless network connection. • Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router) may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the security software or firewall settings appropriately. You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit. • Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit. • To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended. Connecting the network cable Preparing the wireless antenna Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable). If you want to establish a wireless network connection, stand the wireless antenna up straight. Network Attached Storage (NAS) Internet For information on how to connect the unit to a network device wirelessly, see “Connecting to a network device wirelessly” (p.47). WAN LAN Modem PC Network cable The unit (rear) Router ESS WIREL NETWORK AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AV 7 AC IN Mobile device (such as iPod touch and iPhone) TRIGGER OUT 1 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL REMOTE IN RS-232C OUT 2 PR • Do not apply excessive force on the antenna. Doing so may damage it. • If you want to use a wired (network cable) connection when a wireless connection has been made, set “Network Connection” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu to “Wired”. • If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit, as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network parameters manually (p.121). • You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. En 35 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 6 Connecting other devices 7 Connecting the power cable Before connecting the power cable (General model only) Connecting a device compatible with the trigger function Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage. Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz. The trigger function can control an external device in conjunction with operating the unit (such as powering on/off and input selection). If you have a Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection or a device with a trigger input jack, you can use the trigger function by connecting the external device to one of the TRIGGER OUT jacks with a monaural mini-plug cable. • Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a potential fire hazard. TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks NETWORK The unit (rear) TRIGGER OUT NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV 7 PB Y PR AV 2 PB AC IN REMOTE B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL IN OUT 2 PB PR Y E OUT (SINGLE) ROUND SUR. BACK C AV 3 PB VOLTAGE SELECTOR 220V240V WIREL RS-232C OUT 110V120V 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL TRIGGER OUT PR VOLTAGE SELECTOR WIRELESS ER ( 3 NET ) 1 IN COMPONENT VIDEO ( 3 NET ) AV 7 HDMI (HDCP2.2) 3 The unit (rear) RS-232C 2 PR 1 System connector jack 2 SUBWOOFER CE/ L CENTER R FRONT L CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L SINGLE Yamaha subwoofer that supports a system connection After all the connections are complete, connect the supplied power cable to the unit and then to an AC wall outlet. The unit (rear) • You can configure the trigger function settings in “Trigger Output1” and “Trigger Output2” (p.127) in the “Setup” menu. NETWORK ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AC IN OTE RS-232C OUT CENTER En 36 To an AC wall outlet R FRONT L 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 8 Selecting an on-screen menu language AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX Select the desired on-screen menu language from English (default), Japanese, French, German, Spanish, Russian, Italian and Chinese. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Language” and the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired language. 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 5 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. MODE TUNING PRESET To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 • The information on the front display is provided in English only. 4 En 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 9 Configuring the necessary speaker settings AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX If you use any of the following speaker configurations, follow the procedure below to configure the corresponding speaker settings manually before performing YPAO. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 6 When using any of advanced speaker configurations • Advanced speaker configuration (p.22) a Use the cursor keys to select “Power Amp Assign” (p.113) and press ENTER. • Using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.18) b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your speaker system and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • Using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback (p.19) VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 2 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN When using the surround speakers for front 5.1-channel system (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration”  “Layout”  “Surround” (p.114). Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Front” and press ENTER. When using the presence speakers for Dolby Atmos playback • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. a Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Configuration”  “Layout”  “Front Presence” (p.114). BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to select “Speaker” and then “Manual Setup”. 4 Configure the corresponding speaker settings. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. En 38 b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select your front presence speaker layout and press ENTER. 7 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z 10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO • The YPAO function of the unit adopts the YPAO-R.S.C. (Reflected Sound Control) technology that enables to create natural sound fields like a room specifically designed for acoustic perfection. YPAO MIC jack The unit (front) VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position and connect it to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel. • Place the YPAO microphone at your listening position (same height as your ears). We recommend the use of a tripod as a microphone stand. You can use the tripod screws to stabilize the microphone. SCENE BD/DVD 4 YPAO MIC TOP MENU • Note the following regarding YPAO measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN – Test tones are output at high volume and may surprise or frighten small children. OPTION 1 – Test tone volume cannot be adjusted. ENTER 2 – Keep the room as quiet as possible. RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING RETURN – Stay in a corner of the room behind the listening position so that you do not become an obstacle between speakers and the YPAO microphone. 9 3 – Do not connect headphones. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • If you turn on the unit for the first time, the message regarding the network setup appears. For now, press RETURN and proceed to Step 3. 3 Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to maximum. VOLUME MIN MAX CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT MIN 9 MAX En 39 4 YPAO 5 microphone Ear height 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 The following screen appears on the TV. • If you perform the multi measure, the speaker settings will be optimized for you to enjoy surround sound in a wider space. AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET • If you perform the multi measure, first place the YPAO microphone at the listening position you will be seated most frequently. AUDIO Single measure MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 Multi measure (5 listening positions) HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU • To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone before starting the measurement. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 5 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY If desired, change the measuring method (multi/single). d e bac a Use the cursor keys to select “Multi Position” and press ENTER. b Use the cursor keys to select a setting and then press ENTER. Multi measure Multi measure (1 listening position + front/back/left/right) (2 listening positions + front/back) BAND MODE TUNING a PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 b c a e d c a b d Settings Yes No (default) Select this option if you will have several listening positions or if you want others to enjoy surround sound. You can take measurements at up to 8 different positions in the room. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit the area defined by those positions (multi measure). Select this option if your listening position will always be fixed. Take the measurements at only one position. The speaker settings will be optimized to suit that position (single measure). This completes the preparations. See the following page to start the measurement. When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”: “Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure)” (p.42) When “Multi Position” is set to “No”: “Measuring at one listening position (single measure)” (p.41) En 40 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Measuring at one listening position (single measure) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ZONE 2 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM To save the measurement results, use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. When “Multi Position” is set to “No”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 3 minutes to perform the measurement. AUDIO MAIN 3 The adjusted speaker settings are applied. TOP MENU • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement finishes. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.45) or “Warning messages” (p.46). • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.44). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. En 41 • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.98) in the “Option” menu. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 5 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO Caution TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). MAIN ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM When “Multi Position” is set to “Yes”, follow the procedure below for measurement. It takes about 10 minutes to measure 8 listening positions. • If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1) appears, see “Error messages” (p.45) or “Warning messages” (p.46). SCENE 1 Measuring at multiple listening positions (multi measure) The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the measurement immediately. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Measure” and press ENTER. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • To cancel the measurement temporarily, press RETURN. The following screen appears on the TV when the measurement at the first position finishes. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 2 Move the YPAO microphone to the next listening position and press ENTER. Repeat step 2 until measurements at all listening positions (up to 8) have been taken. En 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 When the measurements at the positions you want to measure are completed, use the cursor keys to select “CANCEL” and press ENTER. 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “YES” or “NO” to enable/disable YPAO Volume and press ENTER. When you have taken measurements at 8 listening positions, the following screen appears automatically. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN • If YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 4 Use the cursor keys to select “Save/Cancel” and press ENTER. 5 To save the measurement result, use the cursor keys to select “SAVE” and press ENTER. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • You can also enable/disable YPAO Volume in “YPAO Volume” (p.98) in the “Option” menu. • To check the measurement results, select “Result”. For details, see “Checking the measurement results” (p.44). 7 Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit. This completes optimization of the speaker settings. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 The adjusted speaker settings are applied. • To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”. En 43 Caution • The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Checking the measurement results 3 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can check the YPAO measurement results. 1 AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 • You can also select “Result” from “Auto Setup” (p.110) in the “Setup” menu, which displays the previous measurement results. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU The following screen appears. Reloading the previous YPAO adjustments When the speaker settings you have configured manually are not suitable, follow the procedure below to discard the manual settings and reload the previous YPAO adjustments. 1 In the “Setup” menu, select “Speaker”, “Auto Setup”, and then “Result” (p.109). 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup Reload” and press ENTER. 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM After the measurement, use the cursor keys to select “Result” and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN 1 OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY To finish checking the results and return to the previous screen, press RETURN. 2 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 1 Measurement result items SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Measurement result details ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 The number of measured positions (when multi measure is performed) 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item. Wiring Polarity of each speaker Reverse: The speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Size Size of each speaker (cross-over frequency of the subwoofer) Large: The speaker can reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Small: The speaker cannot reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. Distance Distance from the listening position to each speaker Level Output level adjustment for each speaker En 44 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Error messages If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again. Error message Cause E-1:No Front SP Front speakers are not detected. E-2:No Sur. SP One of the surround speakers cannot be detected. E-3:No F.PRNS SP One of the front presence speakers cannot be detected. E-4:SBR → SBL A surround back speaker is connected to the R side only. When using only one surround back speaker, you need to connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speaker. E-5:Noisy The noise is too loud. Keep the room quiet and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If you select “PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and ignores any noise detected. E-6:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, but no surround speakers are connected. Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use surround back speakers. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect the speakers. E-7:No MIC The YPAO microphone has been removed. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. E-8:No Signal The YPAO microphone cannot detect test tones. Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly and follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-9:User Cancel The measurement has been canceled. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the measurement again. To cancel the measurement, select “EXIT”. An internal error has occurred. Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. E-10:Internal Err. Remedy Follow the on-screen instructions to exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker connections. En 45 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Warning messages If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions. However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1:Out of Phase A speaker cable may be connected with the reverse polarity (+/-). Select “Wiring” in “Result” (p.44) and check the cable connections (+/-) of the speaker identified by “Reverse”. If the speaker is connected incorrectly: Turn off the unit and then reconnect the speaker cable. If the speaker is connected correctly: Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this message may appear even if the speakers are connected correctly. In this case, you can ignore the message. W-2:Over Distance A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft) from the listening position. Select “Distance” in “Result” (p.44) and move the speaker identified by “>24.00m (>80.0ft)” within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position. W-3:Level Error There are significant volume differences between the speakers. Select “Level” in “Result” (p.44) and check the speaker identified by “Over ±10.0dB”, then check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. We recommend using the same speakers or speakers with specifications that are as similar as possible. En 46 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 Connecting to a network device wirelessly ■ Connecting without a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point) or a mobile device by establishing a wireless connection. Connect a mobile device to the unit directly. You can use the application for smartphone / tablet “AV CONTROLLER” to control the unit from mobiles devices or enjoy music files stored on mobiles devices on the unit. Selecting the connection method Select a connection method according to your network environment. ■ Connecting with a wireless router (access point) Connect the unit to a wireless router (access point). You can enjoy Internet radio, AirPlay, or music files stored on media servers (PC/NAS) on the unit. Mobile device (such as iPhone) Internet The unit For details on connection, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.54). Wireless router • You cannot use Wireless Direct simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.35) or the wireless network connection (p.48). Modem • When Wireless Direct is enabled, the following functions are not available. – Internet radio – Network services – Playback of music stored on media servers (PC/NAS) Mobile device (such as iPhone) The unit • For details on “AV CONTROLLER”, visit the Yamaha website. For details on connection, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.48). • You cannot use the wireless network connection simultaneously with the wired (network cable) connection (p.35) or Wireless Direct (p.54). • If the unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart, the unit may not connect to a wireless router (access point). In such case, place them close to each other. En 47 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z Connecting the unit to a wireless network AV 7 V-AUX There are several methods to connect the unit to a wireless network. 1 2 3 PHONO Select a connection method according to your environment. TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 5 2 3 4 6 AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 Do you own iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch)? 6 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 7 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. Yes A (p.48) SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Does your wireless router (access point) have a WPS button? VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM No POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN No Cursor keys ENTER RETURN B (p.50) ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Yes C (p.51) • The checkmark indicates the current setting. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ■ A: Sharing the iOS device setting You can easily setup a wireless connection by applying the connection settings on iOS devices (iPhone/iPod touch). Before proceeding, confirm that your iOS device is connected to a wireless router. 1 2 Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. En 48 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS)” and select “NEXT”. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly If you select “Wireless (WAC)” as the connection method, perform the network setting sharing operation on your iOS device. (The following procedure is a setup example for iOS 8.) AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 1 On the iOS device, select the unit as the AirPlay speaker in the Wi-Fi screen. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM The following connection methods are available. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Wireless (WAC) You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a wireless connection. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting wirelessly”. (You need iOS device with iOS 7 or later.) USB Cable You can apply the connection settings on the iOS device to the unit using a USB cable. For details, see “Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable”. (You need iOS device with iOS 5 or later.) OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET MUSIC INFO SLEEP 2 Check the network currently selected and tap “Next”. Tap here to start setup SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE The name of the unit ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT The network currently selected When the sharing process finishes, the unit is automatically connected to the selected network (access point). En 49 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ❑ Sharing the iOS device setting using a USB cable z AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 If you select “USB Cable” as the connection method, follow the procedure below to share the iOS device setting with the unit. Connect the iOS device to the USB jack, and disable the screen lock on the iOS device. ZONE 2 ZONE CONTROL DISPLAY VIDEO AUX PHONES 1 2 SCENE 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN You can easily set up a wireless connection with one push of the WPS button. • This configuration does not work if the security method of your wireless router (access point) is WEP. In this case, use other connection method. The unit (front) RETURN 1 ■ B: Using the WPS push button configuration Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “NEXT” and press ENTER. 3 Tap “Allow” in the message appeared on the iOS device. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Hold down INFO (WPS) on the front panel for 3 seconds. “Press WPS button on Access Point” appears on the front display. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. 4 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 50 3 Push the WPS button on the wireless router (access point). When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the front display. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. About WPS WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 ■ C: Using other connection methods If your wireless router (access point) does not support WPS push button configuration method, follow the procedure below to configure the wireless network settings. 1 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN 3 4 Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). BAND TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. 4 7 The following connection methods are available. Press ON SCREEN. DISPLAY MODE Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to select the desired connection method and select “NEXT”. Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 8 WPS Button You can set up a wireless connection with the WPS button while viewing the TV screen. Follow the instructions displayed on the TV screen. Share Wi-Fi Settings (iOS) See “Sharing the iOS device setting” (p.48). Access Point Scan You can set up a wireless connection by searching for an access point. For details on settings, see “Searching for an access point” (p.52). Manual Setting You can set up a wireless connection by entering the required information (such as SSID) manually. For details on settings, see “Setting up the wireless connection manually” (p.52). PIN Code You can set up a wireless connection by entering the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). The method is available if the wireless router (access point) supports the WPS PIN code method. For details on settings, see “Using the PIN code” (p.53). Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless (Wi-Fi)” and select “OK”. • The checkmark indicates the current setting. En 51 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ❑ Searching for an access point ❑ Setting up the wireless connection manually If you select “Access Point Scan” as the connection method, the unit starts searching for access points. After a while, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. If you select “Manual Setting” as the connection method, the wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 1 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the SSID of the access point and select “NEXT”. 2 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the security method of the access point and select “NEXT”. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 1 The wireless connection setting screen appears on the TV. SCENE BD/DVD Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. You need to setup the SSID (network name), encryption method and security key for your network. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings None, WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode En 52 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT If you select “None” in Step 2, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 4. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU If you select “PIN Code” as the connection method, the list of available access points appears on the TV screen. 1 If you select other method, enter either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 2 3 ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Enter the unit’s PIN code into the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, refer to the instruction manual of the wireless router (access point). OPTION ENTER Use the cursor keys and ENTER to check the desired access point and select “NEXT”. The PIN code of the unit appears on the TV screen. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ❑ Using the PIN code If you select “WEP”, enter either 5 or 13 character string, or 10 or 26 hexadecimal digits. SCENE 1 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY If “Not connected” appears, repeat from Step 1 or try another connection method. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “CONNECT” and press ENTER to start the connection process. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT When the connection process finishes, “Completed” appears on the TV screen. 4 If “Not connected” appears, check that all the information is entered correctly, and repeat from Step 1. 5 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 53 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 z AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 2 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check “Wireless Direct” and select “OK”. • Wireless Direct connection may be insecure since the communication is not strongly encrypted. The unit may operate by playback operation on wireless devices connected to the unit without permission. SCENE BD/DVD 7 Follow the procedure below to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. AUDIO MAIN Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct) ON SCREEN Press z (receiver power) to turn on the unit. Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). • The checkmark indicates the current setting. OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN • Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. 8 Use the cursor keys (q/w) and ENTER to check the desired security method and select “NEXT”. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 Press ON SCREEN. 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “Network”. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Network Connection” and press ENTER. Settings None, WPA2-PSK (AES) • If you select “None”, the connection may be insecure since the communication is not encrypted. En 54 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 9 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX If you select “None” in Step 8, this setting is not available. Proceed to Step 10. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to enter the security key and select “NEXT”. Otherwise, either 8 to 63 character string, or 64 hexadecimal digits. 1 2 3 4 TV NET RADIO TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET 10 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “OK” and press ENTER to save the setting. The settings made appear on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT a Enable the Wi-Fi function on the mobile device. b Select the SSID displayed in Step 10 from the list of available access points. 12 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM For details on settings of your mobile device, refer to the instruction manual of the mobile device. c When you are prompted for a password, enter the security key displayed in Step 10. SCENE BD/DVD 11 Configure the Wi-Fi settings of a mobile device. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 The SSID and security key information is required for setup of a mobile device. En 55 PLAYBACK AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 Input selection keys Basic playback procedure 1 Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or BD/DVD player) connected to the unit. 2 Use the input selection keys to select an input source. 3 Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU MUTE VOLUME ON SCREEN Selecting an HDMI output jack 1 Press HDMI OUT to select an HDMI OUT jack. Each time you press the key, the HDMI OUT jack to be used for signal output changes. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 9 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. OPTION ENTER HDMIOUTSel. OUT1+2 For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. OUT 1+2 • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.65) OUT 1 • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.69) OUT 2 • Playing back iPod music (p.70) Off Outputs the same signal at both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks. Output the signals at the selected HDMI OUT jack. Does not output the signals at the HDMI OUT jacks. • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.73) • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.76) • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83) • When “OUT 1+2” is selected, the unit outputs video signals at the highest resolution supported by both TVs (or projectors) connected to the unit. (For example, if you have connected a 1080p TV to the HDMI OUT 1 jack and a 720p TV to the HDMI OUT 2 jack, the unit outputs 720p video signals.) Press VOLUME to adjust the volume. • If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2 (“HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125)), you can turn on/off each zone by pressing HDMI OUT repeatedly. • Listening to Internet radio (p.80) 4 • You can also select an HDMI output jack by selecting a scene (p.57). • To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute. • To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE/BALANCE on the front panel (p.98). On-screen input selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select the desired input source and press ENTER. En 56 Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source, sound program, HDMI output and various settings with just one touch. You can use up to 12 scenes to register your favorite settings and switch them depending on a playback source. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO SCENE Press SCENE. The input source and settings registered to the corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on automatically when it is in standby mode. By default, the following settings are registered for each scene. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM SCENE (SCENE key) TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN ON SCREEN OPTION 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO Input (p.56) AV 1 AUDIO 1 NET RADIO TUNER Input Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY HDMI Output BAND MODE TUNING Audio Select (p.100) Auto Auto — — HDMI Output (p.56) OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 OUT 1+2 DSP Program (p.59) Sci-Fi STRAIGHT 7ch Stereo 7ch Stereo Pure Direct Mode (p.118) Auto Auto Auto Auto Enhancer (p.64) Off On On On Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.100) On On On On PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Mode ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can select SCENE 1–4 by pressing SCENE on the remote control. Additionally, you can create 8 scenes (SCENE 5–12) and select those scenes from the “Scene” menu (p.103). On-screen scene selection a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a desired scene and press ENTER. En 57 Configuring scene assignments Selecting setting items to be included as scene assignments AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 1 Set the unit to the condition (such as input source and sound program) that you want to assign to a scene. 2 Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. SCENE DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 SCENE1 SETComplete MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING • The SCENE link playback function allows you to start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. To enable SCENE link playback, specify the device type in “Device Control” (p.104) in the “Scene” menu. • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) To control your playback device after selecting a scene with the remote control of the unit, change the external device assigned to the SCENE keys. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” in the supplied CD-ROM. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 En 58 In addition to the default scene assignments (Input, HDMI Output and Mode), you can also include the following setting items as the scene assignments in “Detail” (p.104) in the “Scene” menu. Sound Tone Control, YPAO Volume, Adaptive DRC, Extra Bass Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode, Dialogue Lift, Dialogue Level, Subwoofer Trim Video Video Mode Volume Master Volume Lipsync Lipsync, Delay Speaker Setup Setting Pattern, PEQ Select Selecting the sound mode AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo playback). AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for movies 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU a Press ON SCREEN. b Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. c Use the cursor keys to select a sound program/surround decoder and press ENTER. • Press MOVIE repeatedly. SCENE 1 PROGRAM On-screen sound program/surround decoder selection POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games (p.60). PROGRAM ON SCREEN OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN ❑ Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo playback • You can change the settings of the surround programs and surround decoders in the “DSP Program” menu (p.105). • Press MUSIC repeatedly. • You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.11) or at the “Audio Signal” screen in the “Information” menu (p.129). This mode lets you enjoy sound field effects optimized for listening music sources or stereo playback (p.61). DISPLAY TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT MOVIE MUSIC SUR.DECODE STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source. About Dolby Atmos® ❑ Selecting a surround decoder BAND MODE • You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing PROGRAM. • Dolby Atmos contents are decoded as Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus or multichannel PCM format in the following situations. • Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel sources (p.63). ❑ Switching to the straight decode mode • Press STRAIGHT. This mode lets you enjoy unprocessed sounds in original channels (p.63). ❑ Switching to the Pure Direct mode • Press PURE DIRECT. This mode lets you enjoy pure high fidelity sound by reducing the electrical noise from other circuitry (p.64). ❑ Enabling Compressed Music Enhancer • Press ENHANCER. This mode lets you enjoy compressed music with additional depth and breadth (p.64). En 59 – Any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected. – Neither surround back nor presence speakers are used. – Headphones are used (2-channel playback). • When the Dolby Atmos decoder is working, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.62), YPAO Volume (p.98) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) does not work. ■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE) Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields (CINEMA DSP 3D) The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as movies, TV programs, and games. ❑ MOVIE THEATER The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP technology (CINEMA DSP 3D). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie theaters or concert halls in your room and enjoy natural stereoscopic sound fields. Standard This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio, such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right, and rear. Spectacle This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides, powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation of the sounds and the separation of the channels. Drama This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for long periods. Mono Movie This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies, in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate reverberation to the original audio. Sound program category MUSIC DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP 3 CLASSICAL HallinVienna MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR “CINEMA DSP n” lights up Sound program • To use the conventional CINEMA DSP, set “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.118) in the “Setup” menu to “Off”. • We recommend using front presence speakers in order to experience the full effect of the stereoscopic sound fields. However, even when no front presence speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) using the front, center, and surround speakers to produce stereoscopic sound fields. • If a multichannel source (6.1 channels or more) is input when no surround back speakers are connected, the unit creates Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers to add a sense of depth to the rear sound field. • When VPS or VSBS is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. En 60 ■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback (MUSIC) ❑ ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’ voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of the fans in a suitable space. Action Game This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field. Roleplaying Game This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field. Music Video This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices to offer the reverberations of an orchestra box in front the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment. En The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources. You can also select stereo playback. ❑ CLASSICAL 61 Hall in Munich This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500 seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This program simulates a 1,700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Hall in Amsterdam The large, shoe box shaped hall seats about 2,200 around the circle stage. Reflections are rich and pleasing while the sound travels freely. Church in Freiburg Located in the south of Germany, this grand, stone-built church has a pointed tower at 120 meters in height. Its long and narrow shape and the high ceiling enable the elongated reverberation time and limited initial reflection time. Thus, the rich reverberation rather than the sound itself reproduces the atmosphere of the church. Church in Royaumont This program features the sound field created by the refectory (dining hall) of a beautiful medieval Gothic monastery located in Royaumont on the outskirts of Paris. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. ■ Enjoying sound field effects without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ❑ LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard The Jazz club is on 7th Avenue, New York. This small club with the low ceiling makes the powerful reflections converge toward the stage located in the center. Warehouse Loft The warehouse resembles some lofts in Soho. Sound reflects off the concrete walls clearly with a lot of energy. Cellar Club This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the unit utilizes Yamaha’s original virtual surround technology to reproduce up to 7-channel surround sound and enable you to enjoy the well-oriented sound field only with the front-side speakers. We recommend using presence speakers in order to enjoy more effective stereoscopic sound field. • When Virtual CINEMA DSP is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with 5 speakers placed in front (Virtual CINEMA FRONT) If you have surround speakers but there is no space to place them in the rear of your room, you can place them in the front (p.18) and enjoy multichannel surround sound using Virtual CINEMA FRONT. ❑ STEREO 2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP). 7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties. When “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, the unit creates the virtual surround speakers in the rear side to allow you to enjoy multichannel surround sound with the 5 speakers placed in the front. • When Virtual CINEMA FRONT is working, “VIRTUAL” lights up in the front display. ■ Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) • CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60) and Virtual CINEMA DSP (p.62) do not work when “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo” is selected. You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program or a surround decoder. En 62 Enjoying unprocessed playback AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can play back input sources without any sound field effect processing. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Playing back in original channels (straight decode) When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for multichannel sources. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Press STRAIGHT. Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is enabled or disabled. OPTION ■ Playing back 2-channel sources in multichannel (surround decoder) The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. • Speakers that produce sounds will change depending on your speaker system and the selected decode type (p.106). • For details on each decoder, see “Glossary” (p.146). 1 Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder. Each time you press the key, the surround decoder changes. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 ENTER RETURN DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP DISPLAY HD 3 STRAIGHT MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR BAND bSurround MODE TUNING ¡SUR.¡DECODE †‡PLƒx¡MOVIE SUR.DECODE PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 STRAIGHT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 9 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT • If “Layout (Surround)” (p.115) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Front”, Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.62) works when multichannel source is played back. bPLIIx Movie bPLII Movie bPLIIx Music bPLII Music bPLIIx Game bPLII Game En 63 MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Use the Dolby Surround decoder suitable for all sources. A real acoustic space (including overhead) will be created especially when object-based audio (such as Dolby Atmos content) is played. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder (or Dolby Pro Logic II decoder) suitable for games. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers even when 2-channel source is input. Neo:6 Cinema Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for movies. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. Neo:6 Music Uses the DTS Neo:6 decoder (or DTS-ES Matrix decoder) suitable for music. Sounds will be output from the surround/surround back speakers. • You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are connected or when “Surround Back” (p.114) in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”. AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT • When the Dolby Surround decoder is selected, virtual surround processing (such as Virtual CINEMA FRONT) (p.62), YPAO Volume (p.98) or Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64) does not work. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 • If the Dolby Surround decoder is selected when only one surround back speaker is used, no sound is output from the surround back speaker (except when a Dolby Atmos content is played). SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (Pure Direct) VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN 1 DISPLAY Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along with any other sound modes. In addition, Compressed Music Enhancer enhances the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) when “Hi-Res Mode” (p.100) in the “Option” menu is set to “On” (default). 1 PRESET Press ENHANCER. Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer is enabled or disabled. Press PURE DIRECT. Each time you press the key, the Pure Direct mode is enabled or disabled. BAND MODE TUNING Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) EnhancerOn VOLUME ENHANCER SL SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP PUREDIRECT HD 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR “ENHANCER” lights up PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR ENHANCER • When the Pure Direct mode is enabled, the following functions are not available. • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. – Some settings for the speakers or sound programs – Operating the on-screen menu and some items in the “Option” menu – Using the multi-zone function – Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation) En 64 • You can also use “Enhancer” (p.99) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer. Listening to FM/AM radio AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or selecting from registered radio stations. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET MAIN PARTY ZONE 2 TUNER • The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used in U.K. and Europe models. HDMI OUT SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press BAND to select a band (FM or AM). DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP Setting the frequency steps VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM antennas. Selecting a frequency for reception FM87.50MHz MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 (Asia and General models only) TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and 9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND BAND MODE TUNING PRESET TUNING 1 2 SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Set the unit to standby mode. When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z STRAIGHT 3 Use the following keys to set a frequency. TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the key for about a second to search stations automatically. Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT). FM98.50MHz STEREO TUNED VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR 4 “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. Numeric keys “STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received. PROGRAM 3 Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TUNER FRQ STEP”. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 4 5 • “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of reception range. TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. En 65 • You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM radio reception in “FM Mode” (p.100) in the “Option” menu. When the signal reception for an FM radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it. Registering favorite radio stations (presets) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their preset numbers. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • You can automatically register FM radio stations that have strong signals by using “Auto Preset” (p.68). Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 2 Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio station. You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once. ■ Registering a radio station VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number. TUNER SCENE 1 ■ Selecting a preset station Preset 01:FM98.50MHz VOLUME 1 Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.65) to tune into the desired radio station. 2 Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds. • “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered. The first time that you do register a station, the selected radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”. Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most recently registered number. • “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered. STEREO TUNED SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Preset number Numeric keys MEMORY Preset STEREO TUNED 01:FM98.50MHz PresetOK VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR • To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning into the desired radio station, use PRESET or numeric keys to select a preset number, and then press MEMORY again. “Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered Preset STEREO TUNED 01:Empty FM98.50MHz VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBL SB SBR En 66 • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. • To clear preset stations, use “Clear Preset” or “Clear All Preset” (p.68). Radio Data System tuning • “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System service. AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Displaying the Radio Data System information SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU 1 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Tune into the desired Radio Data System broadcasting station. ■ Receiving traffic information automatically When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function, follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station. 1 When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program” (TrafficProgram) and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System broadcasting stations (p.68). 2 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again to start the search immediately. BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC STEREO TUNED ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 9 Info ProgramType VOLUME SL • To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed. L C R SW SR SBR SBL INFO 3 4 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT • To cancel the search, press RETURN. Item name • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. Frequency (always displayed) STEREO TUNED FM98.50MHz CLASSICS The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the search finishes. Finished STEREO TUNED TrafficProgram TPFM101.30MHz VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR SBL VOLUME SL L C R SW SR SBR Traffic information station (frequency) SBL Information • “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information stations are found. Program Service Program service name Program Type Current program type Radio Text Information on the current program Clock Time Current time DSP Program Sound mode name Audio Decoder Decoder name En 67 ■ Browse screen Operating the radio on the TV AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX You can view the radio information or select a radio station on the TV. 1 AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 TUNER 1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 3 The playback screen is displayed on the TV. 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 2 VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM ■ Playback screen 1 TOP MENU OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND 3 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. To close the submenu, press RETURN. Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Menu MODE TUNING Submenu Function Memory Registers the current station to the preset number selected in the list. Auto Preset Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong signals (up to 40 stations). Clear Preset Clear the preset station selected in the list. Clear All Preset Clear all the preset stations. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Displays the list of preset stations. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station and press ENTER to tune into it. 2 Preset number POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN 1 Preset station list MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 1 Radio station information Displays the information of the selected radio station such as the selected band (FM/AM) and frequency. (U.K. and Europe models only) When tuning into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67), the Radio Data System information (“Program Service”, “Program Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”) is also displayed. Utility 2 TUNED/STEREO indicators “TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio station. “STEREO” lights up when a stereo signal is received. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen (preset station list). Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 68 1 Page Up 1 Page Down Moves to the previous/next page of the list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. • (U.K. and Europe models only) Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by “Auto Preset”. Playing back music via Bluetooth AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can play back music files stored on a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) on the unit. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 BLUETOOTH Follow the procedure below to establish a Bluetooth connection between a Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit, and play back music stored the Bluetooth device on the unit. The unit SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO Playing back Bluetooth device music on the unit Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) • The unit does not support video playback via Bluetooth. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU • To use the Bluetooth function, set “Bluetooth” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. 1 Press BLUETOOTH to select “Bluetooth” as the input source. • For details on supported Bluetooth devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150). 2 On the Bluetooth device, select the unit (network name of the unit) from the available device list. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN A connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit will be made. DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET If the pass key is required, enter the number “0000”. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 3 4 On the Bluetooth device, select a song and start playback. The playback screen (artist name, album name and song title) is displayed on the TV. • “Not found” appears when no Bluetooth devices are detected. • If the unit detects the Bluetooth device previously connected, the unit automatically connects to the Bluetooth device after Step 1. To establish another Bluetooth connection, first terminate the current Bluetooth connection. • To terminate the Bluetooth connection, perform one of the following operations. – Perform the disconnect operation on the Bluetooth device. – Select an input source other than “Bluetooth” on the unit. – Select “Disconnect” in “Audio Receive” (p.111) in the “Setup” menu. • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 69 Playing back iPod music AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable supplied with the iPod. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start playback. USB • For details on playable iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150). 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • The unit does not support a USB connection for iPad. To play back iPad music on the unit, use AirPlay (p.83). Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 SCENE 1 Playback of iPod content Connecting an iPod TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the iPod. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 1 2 Connect the USB cable to the iPod. Connect the USB cable to the USB jack. The unit (front) ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed. PHONES 3 4 5V 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA 2 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours. If “Network Standby” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to charge without limit. • Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use. En 70 • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the simple play mode (p.72). ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Playback screen 1 2 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. BAND MODE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.72) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN MOVIE 3 5 Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback. Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 71 ■ Operating the iPod itself (simple play) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 MAIN ZONE 2 To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again. 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Operate your iPod itself to start playback. • During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below. 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod. Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode. The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are enabled. AUDIO ■ Shuffle/repeat settings POP-UP/MENU • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY OPTION • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Item BAND MODE MODE TUNING Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. Songs (Songs) Plays back songs in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Albums (Albums) Plays back albums in random order. “x” appears in the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears in the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v” appears in the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP Shuffle (Shuffle) ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 MEMORY ENT 9 Repeat (Repeat) 4 En 72 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on a USB storage device AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on the unit. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION USB The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or FAT32 format). • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150). Connecting a USB storage device 1 Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack. The unit (front) ENTER ON SCREEN OPTION TONE/BALANCE STRAIGHT • Stop playback of the USB storage device before disconnect it from the USB jack. • Connect a USB memory device directly to the USB jack of the unit. Do not use extension cables. Playback of USB storage device contents Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device contents and start playback. You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 Press USB to select “USB” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. (CONNECT) RETURN PROGRAM DISPLAY ENTER BAND RETURN DISPLAY MODE PHONES TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE 5V 1A YPAO MIC SILENT CINEMA MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT USB storage device DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 USB Connected MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display. En 73 • If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is displayed. 2 AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 ■ Browse screen 1 2 3 If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. AUDIO 1 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 5 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as play/pause). 3 Contents list Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92). MUSIC 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. 10 Pages Down En 74 Return Returns to the higher-level list. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. ■ Playback screen AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for playback of USB storage device contents. 1 2 AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 3 1 When “USB” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 2 Playback information POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND OPTION Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER RETURN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. External device operation keys PRESET • Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. MODE TUNING • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.75) and playback status (such as play/pause). Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Shuffle (Shuffle) Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. En 75 Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) ❑ For Windows Media Player 11 You can play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit. • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router (p.35). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. • The audio may be interrupted while using the wireless network connection. In this case, use the wired network connection. • For details on playable file formats, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150). 1 2 3 Start Windows Media Player 11 on your PC. 4 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Library”, then “Media Sharing”. Check the “Share my media to” box, select the unit’s icon, and click “Allow”. Media sharing setup • For details on media sharing settings, refer to Windows Media Player help. To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each music server. ■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server software installed ■ For a PC with Windows Media Player installed Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and configure the media sharing settings. ❑ For Windows Media Player 12 1 2 3 4 Start Windows Media Player 12 on your PC. 5 Click “OK” to exit. Select “Stream”, then “Turn on media streaming”. Click “Turn on media streaming”. Select “Allowed” from the drop-down list next to the unit’s model name. En 76 Playback of PC music contents 3 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and start playback. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 NET You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the input source. The browse screen is displayed on the TV. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. Cursor keys ENTER RETURN • Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected. • If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. BAND MODE TUNING • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92). PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP • If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 2 Use the cursor keys to select a music server and press ENTER. En 77 ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 ■ Playback screen 4 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Status indicators 1 Status indicators VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 3 5 Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status (such as play/pause). 2 Playback information 2 List name POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. OPTION 3 Contents list ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. TUNING External device operation keys PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 4 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total BAND MODE Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.79) and playback status (such as play/pause). Function 1 Page Up Menu Function Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. • You can use the external device operation keys on the remote control to control playback (some functions may not work depending on the PC/NAS). Return Returns to the higher-level list. • You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.102). Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 10 Pages Down En 78 ■ Shuffle/repeat settings You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings for the playback of PC music content. AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 1 When “SERVER” is selected as the input source, press OPTION. 2 Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or “Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING OPTION Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. Item Shuffle (Shuffle) PRESET Setting Function Off (Off) Turns off the shuffle function. On (On) Plays back songs in the current album (folder) in random order. “x” appears on the TV screen. Off (Off) Turns off the repeat function. One (One) Plays back the current song repeatedly. “c” appears on the TV screen. All (All) Plays back all songs in the current album (folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the TV screen. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Repeat (Repeat) 4 To exit from the menu, press OPTION. En 79 Listening to Internet radio AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world. Playback of Internet radio AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 NET • To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.35). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. 1 The browse screen is displayed on the TV. • You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service. • This service may be discontinued without notice. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the input source. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Cursor keys ENTER RETURN 2 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and the playback screen is displayed. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 3 Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. 4 • To return to the previous screen, press RETURN. • You can register your favorite items as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers (p.92). En 80 ■ Browse screen AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 4 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO 1 Playback indicator 1 Playback indicator 2 List name 2 Playback information VOLUME MUTE TOP MENU 3 5 SCENE 1 PROGRAM 1 2 1 2 3 AUDIO 1 ■ Playback screen ON SCREEN Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection. OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Contents list POP-UP/MENU 3 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. 4 Item number/total 5 Operation menu Press the cursor keys (r) and then use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Bookmark On Adds the current station to the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82). Browse Moves to the browse screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Menu Function Bookmark On (Bookmark Off) Adds/removes the station selected in the list to/from the “Bookmarks” folder (p.82). 1 Page Up Moves to the previous/next page of the list. 1 Page Down 10 Pages Up Moves 10 pages forward/backward. • You can use the external device operation key (s) on the remote control to stop playback. Return Returns to the higher-level list. • Some information may not be available depending on the station. Now Playing Moves to the playback screen. Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. 10 Pages Down En 81 Registering favorite Internet radio stations (bookmarks) AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX By registering your favorite Internet radio stations to “Bookmarks”, you can quickly access to them from the “Bookmarks” folder in the browse screen. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 3 ■ Registering the station on the browse/playback screen Access the vTuner website (http://yradio.vtuner.com/) with the web browser on your PC and enter the vTuner ID. You can switch the language. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Select the desired Internet radio station in the browse screen or start playback of it to display the playback screen. 2 Press the cursor key (r) to select “Bookmark On” and press ENTER. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM 1 POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION The selected station is added to the “Bookmarks” folder. Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN Enter the vTuner ID in this area. DISPLAY BAND • To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” folder, select the station in the “Bookmarks” folder and then “Bookmark Off”. MODE TUNING PRESET • To use this feature, you need to create your personal account. Create your account using your e-mail address. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ■ Registering the station on the vTuner website 1 Select any of Internet radio stations on the unit. This operation is necessary to register the radio station for the first time. 2 Check the vTuner ID of the unit. You can find the vTuner ID in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. En 82 4 Register your favorite radio stations. Click the “Add” icon (❤+) next to the station name. • To remove the station from the “Bookmarks” folder, select “Bookmarks” in the Home screen, and then click the “Remove” icon (❤–) next to the station name. Playing back music with AirPlay Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on the unit via network. iTunes Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music contents on the unit. PC (wired or wireless) 1 Router The unit Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or display the playback screen on the iPod. If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon ( iTunes (example) (wired or wireless) iPod iOS7/iOS8 (example) ) appears. iPod iOS6 (example) iPhone/iPad/ iPod touch • If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are connected to the router properly. 2 • To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same router. You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. • When using a multiple SSID router, access to the unit might be restricted depending on the SSID to connect. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and select the unit (network name of the unit) as the audio output device. iTunes (example) iPod (example) • For details on supported iPod devices, see “Supported devices and file formats” (p.150). • You can restrict access to the unit using the AirPlay Password (p.95). Network name of the unit 3 Select a song and start playback. The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and starts playback. The playback screen is displayed on the TV. En 83 • You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by setting “Network Standby” (p.122) in the “Setup” menu to “On”. AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT • You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.123) in the “Setup” menu. AUDIO MAIN ZONE 2 • You can use the external device operation keys (a, s, d, f, g) on the remote control to control playback. • If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the iTunes/iPod stops automatically. • You can adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod during playback. To disable volume controls from iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.102) in the “Input” menu to “Off”. • To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in advance. iTunes (example of English version) SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU • When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod immediately. VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Caution POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Menu operation keys Cursor keys ENTER ■ Playback screen 1 2 BAND MODE TUNING External device operation keys PRESET Check this box SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 3 ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 2 3 5 6 7 4 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 1 Playback indicator 2 Playback information Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed/remaining time. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select scrollable information. 3 Operation menu Press the cursor key (r) to select an item. Press ENTER to confirm the selection. Menu Function Screen Off Closes the screen display and shows the background. Press one of the menu operation keys to redisplay it. En 84 Playing back music in multiple rooms (multi-zone) ■ Enjoying videos/music in another room The multi-zone function allows you to play back different input sources in the room where the unit is installed (main zone) and in another room (Zone2). You can enjoy videos/music using a TV placed in another room. For example, while you are watching TV in the living room (main zone), another person can listen to radio in the study room (Zone2). ❑ Enjoying videos/music using a TV and speakers • Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.152). Video (ZONE OUT or HDMI) • Since there are many possible ways to use the unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the multi-zone connections that best meet your requirements. Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) Multi-zone configuration examples Study room (Zone2) ■ Enjoying music in another room You can enjoy music using speakers placed in another room. Living room (main zone) Connections TV (for analog video playback): p.87 TV (for digital video playback): p.88 Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.25 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87 Audio (SPEAKERS or ZONE OUT) Study room (Zone2) Living room (main zone) Connections Speakers (connecting to the unit directly): p.25 Speakers (using an external amplifier): p.87 En 85 ❑ Enjoying videos/music using only a TV Preparing Zone2 Connect the device that will be used in Zone2 to the unit. Caution • Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting speakers or an external amplifier. Video/audio (HDMI) • Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display when the unit is turned on. Study room (Zone2) ■ Connecting speakers to play back audio Connect speakers to play back audio in Zone2. The connection method varies depending on the amplifier being used (the unit or an external amplifier). Living room (main zone) Connection TV: p.88 ❑ Using the unit’s internal amplifier Connect the speakers placed in Zone2 to the unit with speaker cables. For details, see “Connecting Zone2 speakers” (p.25). En 86 ❑ Using an external amplifier ■ Connecting a video monitor to play back analog videos Connect the external amplifier (with volume control) placed in Zone2 to the unit with a stereo pin cable and connect speakers to the external amplifier. Connect a video monitor to watch analog videos at Zone2. Depending on the video input jacks available on your video monitor, choose one of the video connection methods. The unit (rear) ZONE OUT (ZONE 2) jacks HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) 1 AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT • The video conversion between the analog video jacks does not work for Zone2 video output. To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks with a component video cable. Y ZONE OUT PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 (2 TV) A Y AV ZONE OUT L L R R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 R FRONT SURROUND The unit (rear) L ZONE 2 (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT ANTENNA (HDCP2.2) 2 External amplifier Audio input (analog stereo) AM ZONE OUT) AV 2 1 AV 3 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 AV 4 AV 5 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 A Y AV 1 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT 5 COAXIAL R 6 OPTICAL PR Y (SINGLE) PB Y ZONE 2 R PB PRE OUT ZONE OUT L PB PR B FRONT SURROUND L C AV 3 PB PR 2 SURROUND SUR. BACK R SUBWOOFER SURROUND BACK PR CENTER L COMPONENT VIDEO PB ZONE R BI–AM Y AUDIO Video input (component video or composite video) P 1 Y PR PB PR NA O) AM PB V Y SINGLE ZONE OUT jacks (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) VIDEO V Zone2 Main zone Zone2 Main zone To assign the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks to the Zone2 video monitor, set “Monitor Out Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”. En 87 ■ Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio • When the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, you can enable/disable the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack by setting “Audio Output” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Off” (default). Connect an HDMI-compatible device (such as a TV) to play back videos/audio at Zone2. • You can also use speakers placed in Zone2 to output audio (p.25). • Videos/audio interruptions may happen in another zone when any of the following operations is performed. • To watch videos played back on a video device at Zone2, you need to connect the video device to the unit with an HDMI cable (p.30). – Tuning on/off a TV connected to the unit via HDMI or switching the TV input – Enabling/disabling a zone output or selecting its input source • We recommend that you disable HDMI Control on the playback devices connected to the unit. – Changing the sound mode or audio settings • On-screen operations are not available for Zone2. HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack The unit (rear) HDMI OUT HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) 1 ARC AV 1 2(1 B (HDCP2.2) (ZONE OUT) AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL (1 BD/DVD) PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL HDMI AV 4 (2 TV) L R GND 1 OPTICAL ZO ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM (Example: using a TV) HDMI input HDMI HDMI Zone2 Main zone To assign the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack to Zone2, set “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Zone2”. En 88 ■ Operating the unit from Zone2 (remote connection) Remote connections between Yamaha products An infrared signal transmitter is not required if you are using Yamaha products that support remote connections, as the unit does. You can transmit remote control signals by connecting the REMOTE IN/OUT jacks with monaural mini-jack cables and an infrared signal receiver. You can operate the unit or external devices from Zone2 using the remote control supplied with each device if you connect an infrared signal receiver/emitter to the unit’s REMOTE IN/OUT jacks. REMOTE IN/OUT jacks • (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) You can operate external devices with the supplied remote control if you register a remote control code for each device. For details, refer to “Supplement for Remote Control” on the supplied CD-ROM. REMOTE REMOTE IN/OUT jacks REMOTE IN IN OUT OUT REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Infrared signal receiver The unit (rear) HDMI (HDCP2.2) AV 3 UT/ AV 4 PB Y NETWORK AV 5 AV 6 COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB (3N AV 7 Yamaha products (up to six, including the unit) TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL IN RS-232 OUT 2 A Y AV 1 PB PRE OUT PR Y (SINGLE) C AV 3 PB REMOTE IN PR OUT 1 Remote control 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS UND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R Zone2 SINGLE Infrared signal transmitter Infrared signal receiver External device (such as a CD player) Remote control (supplied with each device) Zone2 Main zone En 89 z Controlling Zone2 4 AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 Input selection keys 1 2 MAIN/ZONE2 SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU 3 Set MAIN/ZONE2 to “ZONE2”. Refer to the instruction manual for the external device. Press z (receiver power). For details on the following operations, see the corresponding pages. Each time you press the key, Zone2 is enabled or disabled. • Listening to FM/AM radio (p.65) When Zone2 is enabled, “ZONE2” lights up in the front display. • Playing back music via Bluetooth (p.69) Use the input selection keys to select an input source. • Playing back music stored on a USB storage device (p.73) OPTION ENTER RETURN DISPLAY BAND MODE TUNING • Video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2 vary depending on how you connect the device in Zone2 to the unit’s output jacks. For details, see “Multi-zone output” (p.152). • You cannot select Bluetooth, USB and network sources exclusively for each zone. For example, if you select “SERVER” for Zone2 when “USB” is selected for the main zone, the input source for the main zone also switches to “SERVER”. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT • Listening to Internet radio (p.80) • Playing back music with AirPlay (p.83) • The on-screen operations are not available for Zone2. Use the front display or web control (p.93) to control Zone2. • AirPlay is available in Zone2 only when AirPlay playback is ongoing in the main zone. ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 1 • Playing back iPod music (p.70) • Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) (p.76) POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN Start playback on the external device or select a radio station. 4 • The Zone2 input automatically switches in conjunction with the input source selected in the main zone when “Main Zone Sync” is selected as the Zone2 input with the web control (p.93) or AV CONTROLLER (p.8). • To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input or use the party mode (p.91). Caution • To avoid unexpected noise, never play back DTS-CDs in Zone2. En 90 ■ Other operations for Zone2 The following functions are also available when Zone2 is enabled. AV 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V-AUX Adjusting the volume Press VOLUME or MUTE. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT Selecting the input source and settings at once (SCENE) Press SCENE. MAIN ZONE 2 PARTY 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN SCENE MUTE Each time you press the key, the party mode is turned on or off. Setting the sleep timer When the party mode is turned on, “PARTY” lights up in the front display. Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min, off). Adjusting the high-/low-frequency range of sounds ENTER a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. RETURN DISPLAY b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”. BAND MODE TUNING c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP ENHANCER PURE DIRECT SLEEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT Press PARTY. • To register the current settings (input source, volume and tone control) to a scene, hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET Complete” appears on the front display. VOLUME OPTION The party mode allows you to play back in Zone2 the same music that is being played back in the main zone. During the party mode, stereo playback is automatically selected for all zones. Utilize this function when you want to use main zone music as background music for a house party. 1 SCENE 1 ■ Enjoying the same source in multiple rooms (party mode) Setting range -6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Default 0.0 dB Adjusting the Zone2 front speaker balance a Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. b Press TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Balance”. c Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment. En 91 • If the party mode does not work on Zone2, set “Party Mode Set” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu to “Enable” (default). Registering favorite items (shortcut) AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX You can register up to 40 favorite USB and network contents as shortcuts and access them directly by selecting the shortcut numbers. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 BLUETOOTH USB NET • You can also use the “Bookmarks” feature to register Internet radio stations (p.82). • Only the input source will be registered for Bluetooth and AirPlay. Individual contents cannot be registered. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO TOP MENU Select a desired item and register it to a shortcut number. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN OPTION 1 2 ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Play back a song or a radio station to be registered. TUNING PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE HD 3 MUSIC MemoryPreset 01:Empty SLEEP 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 RecallPreset 01:USB MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • The registered item cannot be recalled in the following cases. PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR – The USB storage device which contains the registered item is not connected to the unit. Shortcut number (flashes) 1 Use the numeric keys to enter a shortcut number (01 to 40). • “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT INFO Press BLUETOOTH, USB or NET. • “No Presets” appears when no items are registered. DOCK TAG HD PRESET 1 2 Press MEMORY. BAND MODE Recall a registered item by selecting the shortcut number. You can also use PRESET on the front panel to select a shortcut. Registering an item VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Recalling a registered item – The PC/NAS which contains the registered item is turned off or not connected to the network. Numeric keys MEMORY • To change a shortcut number to which the item will be registered, use numeric keys to select the shortcut number after Step 2. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 MemoryPreset 02:Empty – The registered item (file) has been deleted or moved to another location. – A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. • When you register music files stored on a USB storage device or a PC/NAS, the unit memorizes the relative position of the music files in the folder. If you have added or deleted any music files to or from the folder, the unit may not recall the music file correctly. In such cases, register the items again. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR “Empty” (not in use) or item currently registered 3 – The registered network content is temporarily unavailable or out of service. To confirm the registration, press MEMORY. En 92 Controlling the unit from a web browser (web control) You can control the unit with the web control screen displayed in a web browser. Web browser • You can check the IP address of the unit in “Network” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. • You can bookmark the unit’s IP address in the browser or create a shortcut link (p.95) to access the web control screen quickly in the future. However, if you are using a DHCP server, the IP address of the unit may change each time the unit is turned on. Web control (wired or wireless) PC • If you have enabled the MAC address filter (p.122), you need to specify the MAC address of your PC to allow the PC to access the unit. For information on how to check the MAC address of your PC, refer to its instruction manual. Web control • If you are using Windows 8, we recommend you start Internet Explorer in the following way. (wired or wireless) Router The unit – Select “Desktop” in the Start screen and click the Internet Explorer icon at the bottom left of the screen. • By using the application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER”, you can control the unit from an iPhone, iPad, iPod touch or Android devices (p.8). • To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router. • Some security software installed on your PC may block the access of the unit to your PC. In these cases, configure the security software appropriately. • To display the web control screen or turn on the unit from the web control when the unit is in standby mode, set “Network Standby” (p.95) to “On”. • We recommend using one of the following web browsers. – Internet Explorer 9.x, 10.x or 11.x – Safari 7.x 1 2 Start the web browser. Enter the IP address of the unit in the address bar of the web browser. (Example) En 93 ■ Top menu screen ■ Control screen 3 1 5 1 6 2 3 4 4 5 7 2 1 CONTROL 6 1 PLAY INFO Moves to the control screen for the selected zone. Selects an input source or controls playback for the selected zone. 2 STATUS 2 TOP MENU Turns on/off the power for each zone or displays the input source and volume set for each zone. Moves to the top menu screen. 3 SETTINGS 3 SCENE Moves to the settings screen. Selects a scene for the selected zone. 4 PARTY MODE 4 POWER Turns on/off the party mode (p.91). Turns on/off the power for the selected zone. 5 SYSTEM POWER 5 VOLUME Turns on/off the power for all zones. Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the selected zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. 6 MAIN VOLUME 6 RELOAD Adjusts the volume or mutes the audio output for the main zone. You can also select the increments used for volume adjustment. Reloads the current status of the unit. 7 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. • Multi-zone volume adjustment is not available when an external amplifier is used. En 94 ■ Settings screen 2 BACK Moves to the top menu screen. 3 RELOAD Reloads the current status of the unit. 1 Note • If the network settings are changed, you may need to restart the browser or regain access to the unit. • When using the MAC address filter, make sure you specify the MAC addresses of your network devices correctly. Otherwise, the unit will be inaccessible from your network devices such as PCs and other external devices. 2 • Do not operate the unit during the recovery process, as this may result in the incorrect recovery of the settings. When the recovery finishes, click “OK” to set the unit to standby mode. 3 • The backup does not contain user information (such as user account and password) or unit-specific information (such as MAC address and IP address). • Some characters entered with a PC may not appear correctly on the unit. 1 Rename Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.123) or the name of each zone (p.124). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Network Selects the network connection method (p.121) or configures the network parameters (such as IP address) (p.121). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. AirPlay Password Sets the password to restrict access to the unit via AirPlay (p.83). Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. MAC Filter Sets the MAC address filter (p.122) to limit access to the unit from the network devices. Click “APPLY” to apply the changes to the unit. Auto Reload Enables/disables automatic reloading. When “Auto Reload” is “On” (enabled), the web control screen reloads the status of the unit every 5 seconds. Network Standby Enables/disables the network standby function (p.122). Backup/Recovery Creates a backup of the unit’s settings on the PC or restores the settings from the backup. Firmware Update Updates the firmware of the unit by using the firmware you have downloaded on the PC. Follow the on-screen instructions to start the firmware update. Create Link Creates a shortcut link to the desired control screen. Tips Displays tips for use of the web control. Licenses Displays the licenses of the software used in the unit. En 95 Viewing the current status AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX 3 PHONO Switching information on the front display AUDIO 1 2 TUNER MAIN BLUETOOTH ZONE 2 USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT 1 Press INFO. Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes. SCENE 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 Bluetooth USB SERVER AirPlay MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR NET RADIO VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM Info AudioDecoder Input source group Item Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) * During simple playback of iPod: DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Song (song title), Album (album name), Station (station name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) Item name TOP MENU POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for the displayed item appears. OPTION Viewing the status information on the TV ENTER DOCK TAG HD RETURN DISPLAY DISPLAY PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP HD 3 BAND MODE TUNING PRESET ¡¡¡¡AV1 †‡PLƒx¡MOVIE * The name of the audio decoder currently activated is displayed. If no audio decoder is activated, “Decoder Off” appears. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR 1 Information MOVIE Press DISPLAY. The following information is displayed on the TV. SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MUSIC ENHANCER PURE DIRECT Compressed Music Enhancer status INFO INFO SLEEP 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT 3 4 • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed item can also be applied separately to each input source group. Input source group Item AV 1–7 V-AUX AUDIO 1–3 PHONO DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name*) TUNER Input source/ Party mode status Volume/ YPAO Volume status Audio format/ Decoder Sound mode * (U.K. and Europe models only) Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.67). CINEMA DSP status 2 En 96 To close the information display, press DISPLAY. Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu) Option menu items You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily configure settings during playback. 1 Press OPTION. • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display. DOCK TAG HD IN OUT 1 OUT 2 PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 2 3 4 SLEEP HD 3 Option ToneControl • Default settings are underlined. MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Front display Item Function Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range of sounds. 98 Enables/disables YPAO Volume. 98 Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume is adjusted. 98 YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) Dialogue (Dialog) TV screen 2 • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 4 Dialogue Level Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. (Dialog Lvl) 99 Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) 99 Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. Subwoofer Trim Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Subwoofer/Bass (SW.Trim) (Subwoofer/Bass) Extra Bass Enables/disables Extra Bass. (Extra Bass) Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER. Enhancer (Enhancer) Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting. To exit from the menu, press OPTION. 99 Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode) Enables/disables the high-resolution mode (for enhancing the quality of uncompressed digital audio). 100 Enables/disables the video signal processing settings configured in the “Setup” menu. 100 Corrects volume differences between input sources. 100 Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. 100 Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. 100 Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. 100 Input Settings Audio Select (Input Settings) (A.Sel) Video Out (V.Out) 97 99 Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer. Input Trim (In.Trim) En 99 Enhancer (Enhancer) Video Processing (Video Process.) FM Mode (FM Mode) Page Item Function Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) (U.K. and Europe models only) Automatically searches for a traffic information station. 67 Shuffle (Shuffle) Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.72), USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79). — Repeat (Repeat) Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.72), USB storage device (p.75), or media server (p.79). — ■ YPAO Volume (YPAO Volume) Page Enables/disables YPAO Volume or Adaptive DRC. YPAO Volume (YPAO Vol.) Enables/disables YPAO Volume. When YPAO Volume is enabled, the high- and low-frequency levels are automatically adjusted according to the volume so that you can enjoy natural sounds even at low volume. Settings ■ Tone Control (Tone Control) Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds. Off (Off) Disables YPAO Volume. On (On) Enables YPAO Volume. Choices Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass) • YPAO Volume works effectively after the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have been already saved (p.39). Setting range -6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments • We recommend enabling both YPAO Volume and Adaptive DRC when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. Adaptive DRC (A.DRC) • If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels. Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to playback at a low volume at night. • You can also adjust the “Tone Control” setting with the front panel controls by pressing TONE/BALANCE repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”, and PROGRAM to make an adjustment. Settings Off (Off) The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted. On (On) Automatically adjusts the dynamic range when YPAO Volume is enabled. If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a high volume. On Off Input level En 98 Volume: high Output level Output level Volume: low On Off Input level ■ Dialogue (Dialog) ■ Subwoofer/Bass (Subwoofer/Bass) Adjusts the volume or perceive height of dialogue sounds. Adjust the subwoofer volume or bass sound. Dialogue Level (Dialog Lvl) Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim) Adjusts the volume of dialogue sounds. If dialogue sounds cannot be heard clearly, you can turn up its volume by increasing this setting. Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume. Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Setting range 0 to 3 Extra Bass (Extra Bass) Dialogue Lift (Dialog Lift) Enables/disables Extra Bass. When Extra Bass is enabled, you can enjoy enhanced bass sounds, regardless of the size of the front speakers and the presence or absence of the subwoofer. Adjusts the perceived height of dialogue sounds. If the dialogue sounds as if it is coming from below the TV screen, you can raise its perceived height by increasing this setting. Settings • This setting is available only when one of the following conditions is met. Off (Off) Disables Extra Bass. On (On) Enables Extra Bass. – One of the sound programs (except for 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo) is selected when front presence speakers are used. ■ Enhancer (Enhancer) – Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) (p.60) is working. (You may hear dialogue sounds from the surround speakers depending on the listening position.) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer and the high-resolution mode. Setting range 0 to 5 (The bigger the value the higher the position) Enhancer (Enhancer) Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64). Ideal position • This setting is applied separately to each input source. • Compressed Music Enhancer works on both the main zone and Zone 2. • You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.64). Settings Off (Off) Disables Compressed Music Enhancer. On (On) Enables Compressed Music Enhancer. Default TUNER, Bluetooth, USB, (network sources): On (On) Others: Off (Off) • Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz. En 99 Hi-Res Mode (HiRes Mode) Audio Select (A.Sel) Enables/disables the high-resolution mode when “Enhancer” is set to “On”. If this function is set to “On”, you can enhance the quality of uncompressed digital audio (such as 2-channel PCM and FLAC) using Compressed Music Enhancer. Selects the audio input jack to use when more than one audio connection is made for one input source. Settings Settings On (On) Enables the high-resolution mode. (The high-resolution mode may not work depending on the audio signal processing condition.) Off (Off) Disables the high-resolution mode. ■ Video Processing (Video Process.) Auto (Auto) Automatically selects the audio input jack in the following priority order. 1. HDMI input 2. Digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL) 3. Analog input (AUDIO) HDMI (HDMI) Always selects HDMI input. No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the HDMI jack. Always selects digital input (COAXIAL or OPTICAL). No sounds are Coax/Opt (Coax/Opt) produced when no signals are input through the COAXIAL or OPTICAL jack. Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio) settings configured in “Processing” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu. Analog (Analog) Settings Direct (Direct) Disables the video signal processing. Processing (Processing) Enables the video signal processing. Always selects analog input (AUDIO). No sounds are produced when no signals are input through the AUDIO jacks. Video Out (V.Out) Selects a video to be output with the audio input source. Settings ■ Input Settings (Input Settings) Off (Off) Does not output video. Configures the input settings. AV 1–7 (AV1–7), V-AUX (V-AUX) Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks. ■ FM Mode (FM Mode) • This setting is applied separately to each input source. Input Trim (In.Trim) Switches between stereo and monaural for FM radio reception. Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it. Settings Setting range -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) En 100 Stereo (Stereo) Receives FM radio in stereo sounds. Mono (Mono) Receives FM radio in monaural sounds. CONFIGURATIONS 4 Configuring input sources (Input menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can change the input source settings using the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Input” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an input source to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Input menu items • Available items vary depending on the selected input source. • Default settings are underlined. The input source of the unit also changes. • You can still switch the input source by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. En 101 Item Function Page Rename/Icon Select Changes the input source name and icon. 102 Decoder Mode Sets the format of digital audio playback to DTS. 102 Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. 102 DMC Control Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. 102 ■ Rename/Icon Select ■ Decoder Mode Changes the input source name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. Sets the format of digital audio playback to “DTS”. For example, if the unit does not detect DTS audio and outputs noise, set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS”. Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, USB Input sources AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3 (available only when any audio digital input jack is assigned) ■ Setup procedure 1 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a template and press the cursor key (w). Settings Auto Automatically selects an audio format to match the input audio signal. DTS Selects DTS only. (Other audio signals are not reproduced.) ■ Volume Interlock Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay. Input sources AirPlay Settings • You cannot change the template or icon for “USB” when an iPod is connected. 2 3 4 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). Off Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod. Limited Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80 dB to -20 dB and mute). Full Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to +16.5 dB and mute). Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ DMC Control Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback. Input source SERVER Settings • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 5 Does not allow DMCs to control playback. Enable Allows DMCs to control playback. Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network. When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media Player 12) on the same network. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 6 Disable To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 102 Configuring the SCENE function (Scene menu) 4 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. 5 6 Use the cursor keys and ENTER to change the setting. You can change the settings of the SCENE function (p.57) using the TV screen. 1 2 3 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Scene” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Scene menu items Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a scene to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Item Function Save Registers the current settings in the selected scene. Page 103 Load Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. You can also configure the SCENE link playback setting, select items to be included as the scene assignments, or view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. 104 Rename/Icon Select Changes the scene name and icon. 105 Reset Restores the default settings for the selected scene. 105 ■ Save Registers the unit’s current settings (such as input source and sound program) in the selected scene. • You can still switch the scene by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. • If you have changed the input assignment for a scene, you also need to change the external device assigned to the corresponding SCENE key (p.58). En 103 ■ Load Detail Loads the settings registered for the selected scene. Selects items to be included as the scene assignments. You can also view the settings currently assigned to the selected scene. Select “DETAIL” to configure the SCENE link playback setting or view the scene assignments. To include items as the scene assignments, use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER to check the box (or uncheck the box to exclude). Device Control For example, if you often adjust the volume while watching TV but listen to radio with low volume at night, exclude “Volume” from the assignments for SCENE2 (TV) and include “Volume” in the assignments for SCENE4 (RADIO). Recalls a selected scene and starts its playback on an external device connected to the unit via HDMI. (SCENE link playback) Settings Off Disables the SCENE link playback function. HDMI Control Enables SCENE link playback using HDMI Control signals. Select this if an HDMI Control-compatible device (such as a BD/DVD player) is connected to the unit via HDMI. It also turns on the TV if it supports HDMI Control. Check or uncheck Default SCENE1 (BD/DVD), SCENE2 (TV): HDMI Control SCENE3 (NET), SCENE4 (RADIO), SCENE5–12: Off Choices Input • To control playback of an HDMI Control-compatible device by SCENE link playback, you need to set “HDMI Control” in the “Setup” menu to “On” and perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152). Input (p.56), Audio Select (p.100) HDMI Output HDMI Output (p.56) Mode DSP Program (p.59), Pure Direct Mode (p.118), Enhancer (p.64), Enhancer Hi-Res Mode (p.100) Sound Tone Control (p.98), YPAO Volume (p.98), Adaptive DRC (p.98), Extra Bass (p.99) Surround CINEMA DSP 3D Mode (p.118), Dialogue Lift (p.99), Dialogue Level (p.99), Subwoofer Trim (p.99) Video Video Mode (p.119) Volume Master Volume (p.56) Lipsync Lipsync (p.117), Delay (p.117) Speaker Setup Setting Pattern (p.113), PEQ Select (p.116) Default Input, HDMI Output, Mode: selected Sound, Surround, Video, Volume, Lipsync, Speaker Setup: not selected En 104 ■ Rename/Icon Select Configuring sound programs/surround decoders (DSP Program menu) Changes the scene name and icon displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Setup procedure 1 2 3 You can change the settings of the sound programs and surround decoders using the TV screen. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an icon and press the cursor key (w). 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a sound program to be configured and press the cursor key (q). Use the cursor keys to select “DSP Program” and press ENTER. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 5 • You can still switch the sound program by using cursor keys (e/r) after Step 3. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Reset Restores the default settings (p.57) for the selected scene. En 105 4 DSP Program menu items Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. • Available items vary depending on the selected sound program or surround decoder. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Settings for sound programs • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. Item Function Decode Type bSurround*, bPLIIx Movie (bPLII Movie), bPLIIx Music* (bPLII Music*), Selects a surround decoder to be used bPLIIx Game* (bPLII in combination with the selected sound Game*), Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music* program. (* Available only when “SURROUND DECODER” is selected) DSP Level Adjusts the sound field effect level. -6 dB to 0 dB to +3 dB Higher to enhance the sound field effect, and lower to reduce it. Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and presence sound field generation. 1 ms to 99 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Surround Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround sound field generation. • To restore the default settings for the selected sound program, select “Reset”. 5 6 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. En 106 Surround Back Initial Delay Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and surround back sound field generation. Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the presence sound field. Surround Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround sound field. Surround Back Room Size Adjusts the broadening effect of the surround back sound field. Settings 1 ms to 49 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. 0.1 to 2.0 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it. Item Function Liveness Adjusts the loss of the presence sound field. The following items are available when you select “2ch Stereo” or “7ch Stereo”. Settings Sound program 0 to 10 Higher to enhance the reflectivity, and lower to reduce it. Surround Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround sound field. Surround Back Liveness Adjusts the loss of the surround back sound field. Reverb Time Adjust the decay time of the rear reverberant sound. 1.0 s to 5.0 s Higher to enrich the reverberant sound and lower to have clear sound. Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and reverberant sound generation. 0 ms to 250 ms Higher to enhance the delay effect, and lower to reduce it. Adjusts the volume of the reverberant sound. 0% to 100% Higher to strengthen the reverberant sound, and lower to weaken it. Reverb Delay Reverb Level 2ch Stereo Item Function Settings Direct Selects whether to automatically bypass the DSP circuit when an analog audio source is played back. Auto, Off Level Adjusts the entire volume. -5 to 0 to +5 Front / Rear Balance Adjusts the front and rear volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the front side, and lower to enhance the rear side. Left / Right Balance Adjusts the left and right volume balance. -5 to 0 to +5 Higher to enhance the right side, and lower to enhance the left side. Height Balance Adjust the height volume balance using the front presence speakers. 0 to 5 to 10 Higher to enhance the upside, and lower to enhance the downside. (The front presence speakers do not produce sounds when “Height Balance” is set to “0”.) Monaural Mix Enables/disables monaural sound output. Off, On 7ch Stereo • Available items in “7ch Stereo” vary depending on the speaker system being used. En 107 ■ Settings for decoders The following items are available when you set “Decode Type” of “SURROUND DECODER” to “bSurround”, “bPLIIx Music” (bPLII Music) or “Neo:6 Music”. Decode Type bSurround Item Function Settings Center Spread Selects whether to spread the center channel signals to left and right when 2-channel source is played. Off, On Select “On” to spread center channel signals to left and right if you feel the center sound is too strong when 2-channel source is played. Panorama Adjusts the broadening effect of the front sound field. Off, On Select “On” to wrap front left/right channel sounds around the field and generate a spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. Center Width Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. 0 to 3 to 7 Higher to enhance the broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). Dimension Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. -3 to 0 to +3 Higher to strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. Center Image Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. 0.0 to 0.3 to 1.0 Higher to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken (more broadening effect). bPLIIx Music (bPLII Music) Neo:6 Music En 108 4 Configuring various functions (Setup menu) Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an item and press ENTER. You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen. 1 2 Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. • To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN. 3 5 6 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a menu. En 109 Use the cursor keys to select a setting and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Setup menu items Menu Item Function Auto Setup Automatically optimizes the speaker settings (YPAO). 39 Setting Pattern Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 113 Setting Data Copy Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. 113 Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. 113 Front Selects the size of the front speakers. 114 Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. 114 Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size. 114 Surround Back Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size. 114 Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. 114 Subwoofer Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. 115 Layout Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers. 115 Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position. 115 Level Adjusts the volume of each speaker. 115 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. 116 Test Tone Enables/disables the test tone output. 116 Speaker Configuration Page Manual Setup En 110 Menu Item Video HDMI Network Bluetooth Page Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. 117 Auto/Manual Select Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. 117 Adjustment Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually. 117 Dynamic Range Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. 117 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. 117 Initial Volume Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on. 118 Pure Direct Mode Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode. 118 Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. 118 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D. 118 Virtual Surround Back Speaker Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. 118 Object Decode Mode Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents. 118 Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). 119 HDMI Control Enables/disables HDMI Control. You can also configure the relevant settings (such as ARC and TV audio input). 120 Audio Output Selects a device to output audio. 120 Standby Through Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. 121 Network Connection Selects the network connection method. 121 IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). 121 Network Standby Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices. 122 MAC Address Filter Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. 122 Network Name Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. 123 Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth functions. 123 Terminates the Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device (such as smartphones) and the unit. 69 Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). 123 Lipsync Sound Function Audio Receive Disconnect Bluetooth Standby En 111 Menu Item Function Page Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 124 Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. 124 Max Volume Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness in the second zone. 124 Initial Volume Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. 125 Audio Delay Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing. 125 Mono Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. 125 Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. 125 Monitor Out Assign Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks are used. 125 HDMI OUT2 Assign Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. 125 Party Mode Set Enables/disables switching to the party mode. 125 Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. 126 Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. 126 Short Message Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the 11unit is operated. 126 Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. 126 Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. 127 Target Zone Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. 127 Memory Guard Prevents accidental changes to the settings. 127 Auto Power Standby Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. 128 ECO Mode Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode). 128 Select an on-screen menu language. 128 Main Zone Set Zone2 Set Multi Zone Display Set Function Trigger Output1 Trigger Output2 ECO Language En 112 ■ Setting Data Copy Speaker (Manual Setup) Copies the “Setting Pattern” parameters in the specified direction. Configures the speaker settings manually. Choices Pattern1 > 2 Copies the “Pattern1” parameters to “Pattern2”. Pattern2 > 1 Copies the “Pattern2” parameters to “Pattern1”. • Some speaker settings are not available depending on the selected “Power Amp Assign” setting. • Default settings are underlined. ■ Power Amp Assign Selects a speaker system. The unit has 7 built-in amplifiers. You can connect 2 to 9 speakers and up to 2 subwoofers (with built-in amplifier) to create the favorite acoustic space in your room. You can also apply bi-amp connections, channel expansion (using an external power amplifier) or multi-zone configurations to enhance your system. Settings ■ Setting Pattern Basic Select this option when you use the basic speaker configuration (up to 7-channel plus front presence speakers) (p.17). Registers two speaker setting patterns and switches between them. 7ch +1ZONE When you configure the following speaker settings, the settings will be memorized in the selected pattern. Select this option when you use 7-channel speakers in the main zone and Zone2 speakers (p.24). 5ch BI-AMP Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) (p.23). 5ch BI-AMP +SB Select this option when you use 5-channel speakers (including bi-amp front speakers) plus surround back channel expansion using an external amplifier (p.24). • Measurement results (Auto Setup) • Power Amp Assign • Configuration • Distance ■ Configuration • Level Configures the output characteristics of the speakers. • Parametric EQ Settings Pattern1, Pattern2 • When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm (6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”). • The setting pattern currently selected is shown at the top of the “Manual Setup” screen. • This function is useful when you want to save certain settings according to the varying conditions of your listening environment. For example, if you want to switch the settings when curtains are open or closed, you can save the settings suited for each condition and switch between them. En 113 Front Surround Back Selects the size of the front speakers. Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes. Settings Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency components. Large x1 Select this option when one large speaker is connected. The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Large x2 Select this option when two large speakers are connected. The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back channel frequency components. Small x1 Select this option when one small speaker is connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). Small x2 Select this option when two small speakers are connected. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected. The surround speakers will produce surround back channel audio. • “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”. Center Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no center speaker is connected. The front speakers will produce center channel audio. • This setting is not available when “Surround” is set to “None”, or when “Layout (Surround)” is set to “Front”. Front Presence Selects whether or not front presence speakers are connected and their size. Settings Surround Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes. Large Select this option for large speakers. Small Select this option for small speakers. None Select this option when no front presence speakers are connected. Settings Large Select this option for large speakers. The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel frequency components. Small Select this option for small speakers. The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel low-frequency components lower than the specified crossover frequency (default: 80 Hz). None Select this option when no surround speakers are connected. The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program. En 114 Subwoofer • This setting is not available when “Configuration (Front Presence)” is set to “None”. Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected and its phase. • To play Dolby Atmos contents using the front presence speakers, see “Presence speaker layout” (p.19). Settings Normal Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase not reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Reverse Select this option when a subwoofer is connected (phase reversed). The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. ■ Distance Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance from “Meter” or “Feet”. Use None Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Select this option when no subwoofer is connected. The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio and low-frequency components from other channels. Setting range 0.30 m to 3.00 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 10.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments • When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the subwoofer phase. ■ Level Layout Adjusts the volume of each speaker. Selects the layouts of the surround speakers and front presence speakers. Choices Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L, Surround Back R, Front Presence L, Front Presence R, Subwoofer Surround Selects a surround speaker layout when surround speakers are used. Setting range -10.0 dB to 0.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments) Settings Rear Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the rear side of the room. Front Select this option when surround speakers are placed on the front side of the room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT (p.62) works in this case. • This setting is not available when “Configuration (Surround)” is set to “None”. Front Presence Selects a front presence layout when front presence speakers are used. This setting facilitates the optimization of the sound field effect. Settings Front Height Select this option when front presence speakers are installed on the front side wall. Overhead Select this option when front presence speakers are installed to the ceiling. Dolby Enabled SP Select this option when using the Dolby Enabled speakers as the front presence speakers. En 115 ■ Parametric EQ 5 Adjusts the tone with an equalizer. Frequency: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the center frequency of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Settings Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually. For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”. Q: Use the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the Q factor (bandwidth) of the selected band and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. YPAO:Flat Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics. YPAO:Front Adjusts individual speakers to achieve the same characteristics as the front speakers. Setting range Center frequency: 31.3 Hz to 16.0 kHz (31.3 Hz to 250.0 Hz for subwoofer) Q factor: 0.500 to 10.080 YPAO:Natural Adjusts all speakers to achieve a natural sound. Through Does not use the equalizer. 6 Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker balance or equalizer while confirming its effect. Settings ■ Manual equalizer adjustment Set “Parametric EQ” to “Manual” and press ENTER. Press ENTER again to enter the edit screen. Use the cursor keys to select a speaker and press ENTER. • To restore the default settings for all speakers, select “PEQ Data Clear” and then “OK”. • To copy the parametric equalizer values acquired with “Auto Setup” (p.39) to the “Manual” fields for fine adjustment, select “PEQ Data Copy” and then an equalizer type. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Test Tone • “YPAO:Flat”, “YPAO:Front”, and “YPAO:Natural” are available only when the measurement results of “Auto Setup” have already been saved (p.39). Press ENTER again to view the measurement results. 1 2 3 To fine-adjust the center frequency or Q factor (bandwidth), press ENTER repeatedly to select an item. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a center frequency from the 7 preset bands (4 for subwoofer) and the cursor keys (q/w) to adjust the gain. Setting range Gain: -20.0 dB to +6.0 dB En 116 Off Does not output test tones. On Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance or equalizer. Sound Adjustment Configures the audio output settings. Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”. ■ Lipsync Setting range 0 ms to 500 ms (1 ms increments) Adjusts the delay between video and audio by holding up the audio output. Delay Enable Enables/disables the Lipsync adjustment for each input source. • “Offset” shows the difference between automatic adjustment and fine adjustment. Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3 ■ Dynamic Range Settings Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback. Disable Disable the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Enable Enables the Lipsync adjustment for the selected input source. Settings Auto/Manual Select Maximum Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range. Standard Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use. Minimum/Auto Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low volumes. When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is automatically adjusted based on the input signal information. Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output. Setting range Auto Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the unit via HDMI. If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. Manual Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video and audio output manually. Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”. ■ Max Volume Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • Even if “Auto/Manual Select” is set to “Auto”, the automatic adjustment does not work depending on the TV connected to the unit. In this case, adjust the delay manually in “Adjustment”. En 117 ■ Initial Volume ■ Virtual Surround Back Speaker Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on. Selects whether to create Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) using the surround speakers. When VSBS is enabled, the unit creates VSBS when no surround back speakers are connected. Settings Off Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) Settings Off Disables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). On Enables Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS). ■ Pure Direct Mode • VSBS is effective only when 6.1- or 7.1-channel content is played back. Selects whether to output video signals during the Pure Direct mode (p.64). ■ Object Decode Mode Settings Auto Automatically outputs video signals when any videos are input from the selected input source or an input source that can be operated with the on-screen display is selected. When no video signals are input, the wall paper is displayed. Video Off Does not output video signals including the wall paper. Enables/disables playback of object-based audio signals such as Dolby Atmos contents. Settings Disable Disables playback of object-based audio signals. Those signals will be played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio. Enable Enables playback of object-based audio signals. ■ Adaptive DSP Level Selects whether to automatically adjust the CINEMA DSP effect level. • Regardless of this setting, object-based audio signals are played in normal 5.1-/7.1-channel audio if any of CINEMA DSP programs is selected. Settings Off Does not adjust the effect level automatically. On Adjusts the effect level automatically according to the YPAO measurement results and the volume level. ■ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.60). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP 3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch Stereo). Settings Off Disables CINEMA DSP 3D. On Enables CINEMA DSP 3D. En 118 Video Aspect Configures the video output settings. Selects an aspect ratio to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the aspect ratio. 16:9 Normal Outputs 4:3 video signals to a 16:9 TV with black bands on either side of the screen. • This setting functions only when 480i/576i or 480p/576p signals are converted into 720p, 1080i, 1080p, or 2160p (4K) signals. ■ Video Mode Enables/disables the video signal processing (resolution and aspect ratio). Settings Direct Disables the video signal processing. Processing Enables the video signal processing. Select a resolution and an aspect ratio in “Resolution” and “Aspect”. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Direct”, the unit transmits video signals with the least circuitry in order to reduce video output delay. • When “Video Mode” is set to “Processing” and the resolution is being converted, short messages are not displayed on the TV screen. Resolution Selects a resolution to output HDMI video signals when “Video Mode” is set to “Processing”. Settings Through Does not convert the resolution. Auto Selects a resolution automatically in accordance with TV resolution. 480p/576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p, 4K Output video signals with a selected resolution. (Only the resolutions supported by your TV are selectable.) • If you need to select a resolution that is not supported by your TV, set “MONITOR CHECK” (p.133) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “SKIP” and try again. (Note that the output video may not be displayed on your TV normally.) En 119 HDMI ARC Configures the HDMI settings. Enables/disables ARC (p.154) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Settings Off Disables ARC. On Enables ARC. • You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to “Off” and use the TV’s speakers. Standby Sync ■ HDMI Control Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.152). Settings Settings Off Disables HDMI Control. Off Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. On Enables HDMI Control. Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “ARC” and “Standby Sync”. On Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off. Auto Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals. ■ Audio Output • To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152) after connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices. Selects a device to output audio. TV Audio Input Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner. • The “Amp” and “HDMI OUT1” settings are available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”. • The “HDMI OUT2” setting is available only when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) is set to “Main”. Amp Settings AUDIO 1–3 Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones connected to the unit. Default AUDIO 1 Settings • When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input. En 120 Off Disables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. On Enables the audio output from the speakers and headphones. HDMI OUT1, HDMI OUT2 Network Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack or HDMI OUT 2 jack. Configures the network settings. Settings Off Disables the audio output from the TV. On Enables the audio output from the TV. • The HDMI OUT 1–2 jacks output 2-channel audio signals when the unit is turned on. ■ Standby Through ■ Network Connection Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On” or “Auto”, you can use the input selection keys (AV 1–7 and V-AUX) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the standby indicator on the unit blinks). Selects the network connection method. Settings Settings Off (This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.) Does not output videos/audio to the TV. On Outputs videos/audio to the TV. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Outputs videos/audio to the TV. If no signals are detected, the unit is set to the power saving mode. Wired Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network with a commercially-available network cable (p.35) Wireless (Wi-Fi) Select this option when you want to connect the unit to a network via the wireless router (access point). For details on settings, see “Connecting the unit to a wireless network” (p.48). Wireless Direct Select this option when you want to connect a mobile device to the unit directly. For details on settings, see “Connecting a mobile device to the unit directly (Wireless Direct)” (p.54). ■ IP Address Configures the network parameters (such as IP address). DHCP Select whether to use a DHCP server. Settings En 121 Off Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”. On Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network parameters (such as IP address). ■ MAC Address Filter ■ Manual network settings 1 2 Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices. Set “DHCP” to “Off”. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type and press ENTER. Filter IP Address Specifies an IP address. Enables/disables the MAC address filter. Subnet Mask Specifies a subnet mask. Settings Default Gateway Specifies the IP address of the default gateway. Off Disables the MAC address filter. DNS Server (P) Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server. DNS Server (S) Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server. On Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 7 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. • AirPlay (p.83) and DMC (p.102) operations are not subject to the MAC address filter. To configure another network parameter, repeat steps 2 to 4. MAC Address 1–10 To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Procedure ■ Network Standby Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network standby). Settings Off Disables the network standby function. On Enables the network standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) Auto Enables the network standby function. (If “Network Connection” is set to “Wired”, the unit is set to the power saving mode when the network cable is disconnected.) En 122 1 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “MAC Address 1–5” or “MAC Address 6–10” and press ENTER. 2 Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number and press ENTER. 3 Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to select a value. 4 5 6 To confirm the setting, press ENTER. To save the changes, use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Network Name Bluetooth Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices. Configures the Bluetooth settings. ■ Procedure 1 2 Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. ■ Bluetooth Enables/disables the Bluetooth function (p.69). Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth function. On Enables the Bluetooth function. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. 3 4 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. ■ Bluetooth Standby • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from Bluetooth devices (Bluetooth standby). If this function is set to “On”, the unit automatically turns on when a connect operation is performed on the Bluetooth device. To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Settings Off Disables the Bluetooth standby function. On Enables the Bluetooth standby function. (The unit consumes more power than when “Off” is selected.) • This setting is not available when “Network Standby” (p.122) is set to “Off”. En 123 Multi Zone 3 Use the cursor keys to select “OK” and press ENTER. Configures the multi zone settings. • To restore the default setting, select “RESET”. 4 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. ■ Zone2 Set Configures the Zone2 settings. Volume Enables/disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. ■ Main Zone Set If you have connected an external amplifier with volume control to the unit, disable volume adjustments for Zone2. Configures the main zone setting. Settings Zone Rename Changes the zone name (for main zone) displayed on the front display or TV screen. ■ Procedure 1 2 Fixed Disables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. Variable Enables volume adjustments for Zone2 output. • This setting is not available when “Power Amp Assign” (p.113) is set to “7ch +1ZONE”. Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen. Max Volume Use the cursor keys and ENTER to rename and select “ENTER” to confirm the entry. Sets the Zone2 maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness. Setting range -30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. • To clear the entry, select “CLEAR”. En 124 Initial Volume ■ Monitor Out Assign Sets the Zone2 initial volume for when the unit is turned on. Select the zone for which the MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO) jacks are used. Settings Settings Main, Zone2 Off Sets the level at the volume level of the unit when it last entered standby mode. On Sets at Mute or the specified volume level (-80 dB to +16.5 dB, 0.5 dB increments). (This setting works only when the initial volume is set lower than “Max Volume”.) • To watch videos played back on a video device on the Zone2 video monitor, you need to connect the video monitor to the unit in the same way as the video device. For example, if you want to watch videos input from the DVD player via a component video cable, connect the video monitor to the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks with a component video cable. ■ HDMI OUT2 Assign • This setting is available only when “Volume” is set to “Variable”. Select the zone for which the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is used. Audio Delay Settings Main, Zone2 Adjusts the Zone2 audio output timing so that the audio is synchronized with the video. Setting range 0 ms to 100 ms (1 ms increments) • For details on video/audio signals that can be output to Zone2, see “Multi-zone output” (p.152). Mono Audio Output Switches between stereo and monaural for Zone2 output. Enables/disables the audio output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” is set to “Zone2”. Settings Off Produces stereo sounds in Zone2. On Enables the audio output. On Produces monaural sounds in Zone2. Off Disables the audio output (video output only). Zone Rename ■ Party Mode Set Changes the zone name (for Zone2) displayed on the front display or TV screen. Enables/disables switching to the party mode (p.91). You can change the zone name in the same manner as “Zone Rename” in “Main Zone Set” (p.124). Choice Target: Zone2 Settings En 125 Disable Disables switching to the party mode. Enable Enables switching to the party mode. You can turn on/off the party mode by pressing PARTY on the remote control. Function 3 To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use. • You cannot assign both COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to the same input source. ■ Display Set Configures the settings related to the front display and TV screen display. Dimmer (Front Display) Adjusts the brightness of the front display. Setting range -4 to 0 (higher to brighten) ■ Input Assignment Assigns the COMPONENT VIDEO, COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks to another input source. • The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.128) is set to “On”. Short Message ■ Procedure Selects whether to display short messages on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). Example: assigning the OPTICAL (b) jack to the input source “AV 2” 1 Use the cursor keys to select the cell at the intersection of “AV 2” and “Optical”, and press ENTER. Settings On Displays short messages on the TV screen. Off Does not display short messages on the TV screen. Wallpaper Selects the image to be used as wallpaper on the TV. Settings 2 Use the cursor keys to select “b” and press ENTER. En 126 Piano Displays the piano image on the TV screen when there is no video signal. Gray Displays a gray background on the TV screen when there is no video signal. ■ Trigger Output1, Trigger Output2 Target Zone Sets the TRIGGER OUT 1–2 jacks to function in sync with the power status of each zone or input switching. Specifies the zone with which the TRIGGER OUT jack functions are synchronized. Settings Trigger Mode Specifies the condition for the TRIGGER OUT jack to function. Main When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone. Zone2 When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in Zone2. All When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Power”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the power status of the main zone or Zone2. When “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”, electronic signal transmission is synchronized with the input switching in the main zone or Zone2. Settings Power The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the power status of the zone specified with “Target Zone”. Source The TRIGGER OUT jack functions in sync with the input switching in the zone specified with “Target Zone”. An electronic signal is transmitted according to the setting made in “Source.” Manual Select this to manually switch the output level for electronic signal transmission with “Manual”. Source ■ Memory Guard Specifies the output level of the electronic signal transmitted with each input, switching when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Source”. Prevents accidental changes to the settings. Settings Choices AV 1–7, V-AUX, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, TUNER, (network sources), Bluetooth, USB Off Does not protect the settings. Settings On Protects the settings until “Off” is selected. Low Stops the electronic signal transmission when you switch to the input source specified in this option. High Transmits the electronic signal when you switch to the input source specified in this option. • When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen. Icon Manual Switches the output level for electronic signal transmission manually when “Trigger Mode” is set to “Manual”. This setting can also be used to confirm proper function of the external device connected via the TRIGGER OUT jack. Choices Low Stops the electronic signal transmission. High Transmits the electronic signal. En 127 ■ ECO Mode ECO Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode. Configures the power supply settings. When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption. Settings Off Disables the eco mode. On Enables the eco mode. • The new setting will take effect after the unit is restarted. • When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark. • If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”. ■ Auto Power Standby Language Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit or if no input signals are detected for the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode. Select an on-screen menu language. Settings Off Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically. 20 Minutes Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit and no input signals are detected for 20 minutes. 2 Hours, 4 Hours, 8 Hours, 12 Hours Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for the specified time. For example, when “2 Hours” is selected, the unit will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours. Default U.K. and Europe models: 20 Minutes Other models: Off Settings • Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerStdby” appears and then countdown starts in the front display. English English 日本語 Japanese Français French Deutsch German Español Spanish Russian Italiano Italian Chinese • The information on the front display is provided in English only. En 128 Types of information Viewing information about the unit (Information menu) ■ Audio Signal You can view information about the unit using the TV screen. 1 2 Displays information about the current audio signal. Press ON SCREEN. Use the cursor keys to select “Information” and press ENTER. Format Audio format of the input signal Channel The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE) For example, “5.1 (3/2/0.1)” means 5.1ch in total (3 front channels, 2 surround channels, and LFE). Sampling The number of samples per second of the input digital signal Bitrate The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal Dialogue The dialogue normalization level of the input bitstream signal Input Output 3 The speaker terminals from which signals are output • Even when the unit is set to output bitstream signals directly, the signal may be converted depending on the specifications and settings of the playback device. Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select an information type. ■ Video Signal Displays information about the current video signal. 4 HDMI Signal Presence or absence of HDMI signal input/output HDMI Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog or HDMI) and output signal (HDMI) Analog Resolution Resolutions of input signal (analog) and signal output at the MONITOR OUT jacks (analog) ■ HDMI Monitor To exit from the menu, press ON SCREEN. Displays information about the TVs connected to the HDMI OUT jacks. Use the cursor keys (q/w) to switch between “OUT1” and “OUT2”. En 129 Interface TV interface Video Resolution Resolutions supported by the TV ■ Network ■ System Displays the network information on the unit. Displays the system information on the unit. (When using wired or wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) Remote ID The unit’s remote control ID setting (p.132) IP Address IP address TV Format The unit’s video signal type (p.132) Subnet Mask Subnet mask Speaker Impedance The speaker impedance setting of the unit (p.131) Default Gateway The IP address of the default gateway Tuner Freq. Step (Asia and General models only) The FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit (p.132) DNS Server (P) The IP address of the primary DNS server System ID System ID number DNS Server (S) The IP address of the secondary DNS server Firmware Version The version of firmware installed on the unit MAC Address (Ethernet) MAC address MAC Address (Wi-Fi) vTuner ID vTuner ID Network Name Network name (the unit’s name on the network) (p.123) Wired/Wireless The status of the wired or wireless connection SSID (When using wireless [Wi-Fi] network connection) The SSID of the wireless network • If the unit detects a newer firmware over the network, “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and the corresponding message will be displayed in this screen. You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in this screen and following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.135). ■ Multi Zone Displays information about Zone2. (When using Wireless Direct) SSID The SSID of the wireless network Security Security method Security Key Security key IP Address IP address Subnet Mask Subnet mask MAC Address (Wi-Fi) MAC address Network Connection “Wireless Direct” indication En 130 Input The input source selected for Zone2 Volume The volume for Zone2 ADVANCED SETUP menu items Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) • Default settings are underlined. Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display. 1 2 Set the unit to standby mode. While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press MAIN ZONE z. MAIN ZONE z Function SPEAKER IMP. Changes the speaker impedance setting. 131 REMOTE SENSOR Turns on/off of the remote control sensor on the main unit. 132 REMOTE CON AMP Selects the unit’s remote control ID. 132 TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting. 132 TV FORMAT Switches the video signal type. 132 MONITOR CHECK Removes the limitation on HDMI video output. 133 4K MODE Selects the HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signal format. 133 RECOV./BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. 133 INITIALIZE Restores the default settings. 133 FIRM UPDATE Updates the firmware. 134 VERSION Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. 134 STRAIGHT PROGRAM 3 4 5 Item Press PROGRAM to select an item. Press STRAIGHT to select a setting. Press MAIN ZONE z to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again. Page Changing the speaker impedance setting (SPEAKER IMP.) The new settings take effect. DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 ¡SPEAKER¡IMP. ¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡¡8¬MIN MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the speakers connected. Settings En 131 6  MIN Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers. 8  MIN Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the unit. Turning on/off the remote control sensor (REMOTE SENSOR) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 REMOTESENSOR ON Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TUNER FRQ STEP) (Asia and General models only) MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 SLEEP PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 Turn on/off the remote control sensor on the main unit. While the remote control sensor is turned off, you cannot control the unit from the remote control. Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or region. Settings ON Turns on the remote control sensor. OFF Turns off the remote control sensor. Settings Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE CON AMP) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 REMOTECONAMP ID1 FM100/AM10 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz steps and AM by 10-kHz steps. FM50/AM9 Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps and AM by 9-kHz steps. Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default: ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver. HD 3 TVFORMAT NTSC MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Switch the video signal type of the unit so that it matches to the format of your TV. Settings ID1, ID2 Settings NTSC, PAL ■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control 1 TUNERFRQSTEP FM50/AM9 Default U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC Other models: PAL To select ID1, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE1 (BD/DVD) together for 3 seconds. To select ID2, hold down the cursor key (e) and SCENE2 (TV) together for 3 seconds. En 132 Removing the limitation on HDMI video output (MONITOR CHECK) Backing up/recovering the settings (RECOV./BACKUP) SPIMP.- SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 MONITORCHECK YES DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 RECOV./BACKUP BACKUP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Creates backup of the settings of the unit, or recovers the settings from the backup. The unit automatically detects resolutions supported by a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack. ■ Backup/recovery procedure 1 Disable the monitor check function if you want to specify a resolution in “Resolution” (p.119) when the unit cannot detect the TV’s resolution or when you want to specify a different resolution than the detected resolution. Choices Settings YES Enables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a resolution supported by the TV only.) SKIP Disables the monitor check function. (Outputs video signals with a specified resolution regardless of compatibility with the TV.) Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “BACKUP” or “RECOVERY” and press INFO to start the process. BACKUP Creates backup of the settings of the unit in the internal memory. RECOVERY Recovers the settings of the unit from the backup (available only when backup has been created). Note • Do not turn off the unit during the recovery process. Otherwise, the settings may not be restored correctly. • Reset to “YES” if the unit becomes inoperable because video from the unit cannot be displayed on the TV after “MONITOR CHECK” has been set to “SKIP”. • The backup does not contain user information (such as user accounts and passwords). Restoring the default settings (INITIALIZE) Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format (4K MODE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 4KMODE MODE2 SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 INITIALIZE CANCEL MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR Restores the default settings for the unit. Selects the format of signals input/output at the unit when HDMI 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) compatible TV and playback device are connected to the unit. Choices Settings MODE 1 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0 format. (4:2:0 format only for VIDEO AUX [HDMI IN] jack) Depending on the connected device or HDMI cables, video may not be displayed correctly. In this case, select “MODE 2”. MODE 2 Inputs/outputs 4K (60 Hz/50 Hz) signals in 4:2:0 format. • When “MODE 1” is selected, use a high-speed HDMI cable that supports 18 Gbps. En 133 VIDEO Restores the default settings for video configurations. ALL Restores the default settings for the unit. CANCEL Does not perform an initialization. Updating the firmware (FIRM UPDATE) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP HD 3 FIRMUPDATE USB Checking the firmware version (VERSION) SPIMP.- DOCK TAG HD STEREO TUNED PRE AMP PARTY ZONE ZONE ZONE 3 4 IN OUT 1 OUT 2 2 ENHANCER SLEEP MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR HD 3 New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from the Yamaha website. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details, refer to the information supplied with updates. • It may take a while until the firmware version is displayed. Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to start firmware update. Choices Update the firmware using a USB memory device. NETWORK Update the firmware via the network. PL L C R PR SL SW1 SW SW2 SR PL SBL SB SBR PR • You can also check the firmware version in “System” (p.130) in the “Information” menu. Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware. USB MUTE VOLUME ADAPTIVE DRC Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit. ■ Firmware update procedure 1 VERSION x.xx • If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the corresponding message will be displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in “Updating the unit’s firmware via the network” (p.135). En 134 Updating the unit’s firmware via the network AV 1 5 2 3 4 6 7 V-AUX New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and update it. AUDIO 1 2 3 PHONO TUNER BLUETOOTH USB NET PARTY HDMI OUT MAIN ZONE 2 1 2 3 4 BD/DVD TV NET RADIO • Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more (depending on your Internet connection speed). TOP MENU • If the unit is connected to the wireless network, network update may not be possible depending on the condition of the wireless connection. In this case, update the firmware using the USB memory device (p.134). VOLUME MUTE PROGRAM • If you want to update the firmware later, select “CLOSE” in Step 2. “!” (exclamation mark) appears at the upper right of the “Information” and “System” icons, and a message will be displayed in the “System” screen (p.130). You can update the unit’s firmware by pressing ENTER in the “System” screen. • For details on update, visit the Yamaha website. POP-UP/MENU ON SCREEN If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!” appears on the front display, press MAIN ZONE z on the front panel. The firmware update is complete. Note SCENE 3 OPTION Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY • You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.134). Information icon BAND A firmware update is available if the following message is displayed after ON SCREEN is pressed. MODE TUNING PRESET SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT MOVIE MUSIC INFO SLEEP 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 MEMORY ENT ENHANCER PURE DIRECT 4 Message System Icon 1 2 Read the on-screen description. To start the firmware update, use the cursor keys to select “START” and press ENTER. The on-screen display turns off. En 135 APPENDIX Frequently asked questions The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound balance... enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device. If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use “Auto Setup” to optimize the speaker settings again (p.39). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually, use “Manual Setup” in the “Setup” menu (p.113). I want to turn off the on-screen messages displayed during operations... Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the volume control... By default, short messages are displayed on the TV screen when the unit is operated (such as input selection and volume adjustment). If the short messages bother you when you are watching movies or sports, configure “Short Message” (p.126) in the “Setup” menu to turn off the short messages. If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum volume level for the unit in advance (p.117). You can also set the maximum volume for Zone2 (p.124). I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings... You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.127). I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning on the unit... The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another Yamaha product as well as the unit... By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.118). You can also set the initial volume for Zone2 (p.125). When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens, register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each remote control (p.132). We are bothered by volume differences when switching between input sources… You can correct volume differences between input sources by utilizing “Input Trim” in the “Option” menu (p.100). I want to enjoy videos/audio played back on the video device even when the unit is in standby mode... I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at all... If you have connected a video device to the unit with HDMI, you can output videos/audio played back on the video device to the TV even when the unit is in standby mode. To use this function, set “Standby Through” (p.121) in the “Setup” menu to “On” or “Auto”. You can also switch the input source using the remote control of the unit when this function is enabled. To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.152). After connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit, En 136 Troubleshooting Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. First, check the following: a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets securely. b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on. c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device. Power, system and remote control Problem Cause Remedy The power does not turn on. The protection circuitry has been activated three times consecutively. When the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator on the unit blinks if you try to turn on the power. As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair. The power does not turn off. The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The power turns off (standby mode) immediately. The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.21). The sleep timer worked. Turn on the unit and start playback again. The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used for the specified time. To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Standby” in the “Setup” menu to “Off” (p.128). The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.131). The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit. Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and speakers (p.21). The protection circuitry has been activated because the volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.128). The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop in the power supply voltage. Hold down MAIN ZONE z on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize and reboot the unit. (If the problem persists, disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and plug it again.) The unit enters standby mode automatically. The unit is not reacting. En 137 Problem The unit cannot be controlled using the remote control. Cause Remedy The unit is out of the operating range. Use the remote control within the operating range (p.5). The batteries are weak. Replace with new batteries. The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting. Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit. (China, Korea, U.K. and Europe models only) The remote control is set to control external devices. Press RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key lights up in orange). The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.132). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input. Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio format of the input signal, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The maximum volume is set. Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.117). Audio Problem No sound. The volume cannot be increased. A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit. The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the speaker. To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.116). Audio output of the speaker is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the speaker settings (p.113). The volume of the speaker is set too low. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker volume (p.115). The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable. The speaker is malfunctioning. To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be malfunctioning. No sound is coming from a specific speaker. En 138 Problem No sound is coming from the subwoofer. No sound from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is used). Only the front speakers work on multichannel audio. Cause Remedy The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency signals. To check if the subwoofer is working properly, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.116). Subwoofer output is disabled. Perform “Auto Setup” (p.39) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.115). The volume of the subwoofer is too low. Adjust the volume on the subwoofer. The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function. Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level. The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from the SPEAKERS terminals. In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.120). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers. Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the speakers connected to the unit. A TV that does not support ARC is connected to the unit only with an HDMI cable. Use a digital optical cable to make an audio connection (p.28). (If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable) The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection. Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack (p.120). (If you are trying to use ARC) ARC is disabled on the unit or TV. Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.120). Also, enable ARC on the TV. The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as PCM) only. To check it, use “Audio Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). If necessary, change the digital audio output setting on the playback device. The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device. Move the unit further away from the device. The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The volume of the unit is too high. Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.128). A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks. If the HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack is assigned to Zone2, HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.88). Noise/hum is heard. The sound is distorted. The sound is interrupted. En 139 Video Problem No video. No video from the playback device (connected to the unit with HDMI). Cause Remedy Another input source is selected on the unit. Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys. Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV. Set “MONITOR CHECK” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “YES” (p.133). The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is defective. If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable. The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit. To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Video Signal” in the “Information” menu (p.129). For information about video signals supported by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.154). The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications. If you want to play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, both the TV and playback device must support HDCP 2.2. The playback device that supports HDCP 2.2 is connected to the VIDEO AUX (HDMI IN) jack. To play back contents that require HDCP 2.2-compatible devices, connect the playback device to the HDMI (AV 1–7) jack (p.30). The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI devices. The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI. You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.28). Another input source is selected on the TV. Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack). (If you are using 2 TVs in the main zone) Another TV is turned off when “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected. Select “HDMI OUT 1” or “HDMI OUT 2” to output the signals only to the TV you are using (p.56). (If the HDMI OUT 2 jack is assigned to Zone2) HDMI audio output may be interrupted during some zone operations due to internal circuitry switching. For details, see “Connecting an HDMI-compatible device to play back videos/audio” (p.88). The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV. The video is interrupted. En 140 FM/AM radio Problem Cause Remedy There is multi-path interference. Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. Set “FM Mode” in the “Option” menu to “Mono” to select monaural FM radio reception (p.100). FM radio reception is weak or noisy. Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. AM radio reception is weak or noisy. The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats, or other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor AM antenna. Select the station manually (p.65). Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter. Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element antenna. Adjust the AM antenna orientation. Radio stations cannot be selected automatically. Select the station manually (p.65). The AM radio signal is weak. Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with the supplied AM antenna. AM radio stations cannot be registered as presets. Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations manually (p.66). Auto Preset has been used. En 141 Bluetooth Problem A Bluetooth connection cannot be established. No sound is produced, or the sound is interrupted during playback. Cause Remedy The Bluetooth function of the unit is disabled. Enable the Bluetooth function (p.123). Another Bluetooth device is already connected to the unit. Terminate the current Bluetooth connection and then establish a new connection (p.69). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. The Bluetooth device does not support A2DP. Use a Bluetooth device that supports A2DP. The connection information registered on the Bluetooth device is not working for some reason. Delete the connection information on the Bluetooth device, and then establish a connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.69). The volume of the Bluetooth device is set too low. Turn up the volume of the Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth device is not set to send audio signals to the unit. Switch the audio output of the Bluetooth device to the unit. The Bluetooth connection has been terminated. Establish a Bluetooth connection between the Bluetooth device and the unit again (p.69). The unit and the Bluetooth device are too far apart. Move the Bluetooth device closer to the unit. There is a device (such as microwave oven and wireless LAN) that outputs signals in the 2.4 GHz frequency band nearby. Move the unit away from those devices. En 142 USB and network Problem Cause Remedy The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely. Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again. The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32. Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format. Folders and files in the USB device cannot be viewed. The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption. Use a USB device without an encryption function. The files in the USB device cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The network feature does not function. The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained properly. Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup” menu to “On” on the unit (p.121). If you want to configure the network parameters manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other network devices in your network (p.121). The wireless router (access point) is turned off. Turn on the wireless router. The unit and the wireless router (access point) are too far apart. Place the unit and the wireless router (access point) closer to each other. There is an obstacle between the unit and the wireless router (access point). Move the unit and the wireless router (access point) in a location where there are no obstacles between them. Microwave ovens or other wireless devices in your neighborhood might disturb the wireless communication. Turn off these devices. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of the wireless router (access point). Check the firewall setting of the wireless router (access point). The media sharing setting is not correct. Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.76). Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access of the unit to your PC. Check the settings of security software installed on your PC. The unit and PC are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and the PC to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your PC to allow it to access to the unit (p.122). The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played back. The files are not supported by the unit or the media server. Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). The files in the PC cannot be played back continuously. Files not supported by the unit exist in the selected folder. If the unit detects a series of unsupported files (such as images and hidden files) during playback, playback stops automatically. Do not store the unsupported files in the playback folder. The unit does not detect the USB device. The unit cannot connect to the Internet via a wireless router (access point). Wireless network is not found. The unit does not detect the PC. En 143 Problem The Internet radio cannot be played. The iPod does not recognize the unit when using AirPlay. Cause Remedy The selected Internet radio station is currently not available. There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have been stopped. Try the station later or select another station. The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting silence. Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try the station later or select another station. Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your network devices (such as the router). Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number varies depending on the radio station. The unit is connected to a multiple SSID router. Access to the unit might be restricted by the network separation function on the router. Connect the iPod to the SSID which can access the unit. The unit and smartphone/tablet are not in the same network. Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the unit and smartphone/tablet to the same network. The MAC address filter is enabled on the unit. In “MAC Address Filter” in the “Setup” menu, disable the MAC address filter or specify the MAC address of your smartphone/tablet to allow it to access to the unit (p.122). It may not be possible depending on the condition of the network. Update the firmware via the network again or use a USB memory device (p.134). The application for smartphone/tablet “AV CONTROLLER” does not detect the unit. Firmware update via the network is failed. En 144 Error indications on the front display Message Cause Remedy Access denied Access to the PC is denied. Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared (p.76). The unit cannot access the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot access the iPod. Turn off the iPod and turn it on again. The connected iPod is not supported by the unit. Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.70). Access error Make sure your router and modem are turned on. There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit. Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.35). Check SP Wires The speaker cables short circuit. Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly. Internal Error An internal error has occurred. Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. No content There are no playable files in the selected folder. Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit. The unit cannot detect the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. The unit cannot detect the iPod. Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again. Please wait The unit is preparing for connecting to the network. Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn it on again. RemID Mismatch The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not identical. Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.132). Remote Off The unit cannot be operated from remote control because the remote control sensor on the main unit is turned off. Use the controls on the front panel. To use the remote control, set “REMOTE SENSOR” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to “ON” (p.132). The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the USB device for some reasons. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on another device, the song data may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some reason. Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be defective. The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some reason. Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.76). If the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with heavy traffic. USB Overloaded An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device. Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device. Version error Firmware update is failed. Update the firmware again. No device Unable to play En 145 Glossary Audio information Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources (for 2-channel sources only). ■ Audio decoding format Dolby Surround Dolby Atmos Dolby surround is a next generation surround technology that intelligently up mixes stereo; 5.1 and 7.1 content for playback through your surround speaker system. Dolby surround is compatible with traditional speaker layouts, as well as Dolby Atmos enabled playback systems that employ in-ceiling speakers or products with Dolby speaker technology. Introduced first in the cinema, Dolby Atmos brings a revolutionary sense of dimension and immersion to the Home Theater experience. Dolby Atmos is an adaptable and scalable object based format that reproduces audio as independent sounds (or objects) that can be accurately positioned and move dynamically throughout the 3 dimensional listening space during playback. A key ingredient of Dolby Atmos is the introduction of a height plane of sound above the listener. Dolby TrueHD Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Atmos Stream Dolby Atmos content will be delivered to your Dolby Atmos enabled AV receiver via Dolby Digital Plus or Dolby TrueHD on Blu-ray Disc, downloadable files and streaming media. A Dolby Atmos stream contains special metadata that describes the positioning of sounds within the room. This object audio data is decoded by a Dolby Atmos AV receiver and scaled for optimum playback through Home Theater speaker systems of every size and configuration. DSD (Direct Stream Digital) DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate (such as 2.8224 MHz and 5.6448 MHz). The highest frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology offers better audio quality than that used for CDs. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. DTS 96/24 Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc. Dolby Digital Plus DTS Digital Surround Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs. Dolby Enabled Speaker DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a discrete surround back channel is recorded. DTS-ES A convenient alternative to speakers built into the ceiling, products utilizing Dolby speaker technology employ the ceiling above you as a reflective surface for reproducing audio in the height plane above the listener. Dolby enabled speakers feature a unique upward firing driver and special signal processing that can be built into a conventional speaker, or a standalone speaker module, minimally impacting the overall speaker system footprint while providing an immersive listening experience during Dolby Atmos and Dolby surround playback. DTS Express DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports 7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). En 146 ■ Others DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs). Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp) A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference. DTS Neo:6 LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound. This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio. FLAC Lip sync FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality. Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag between audio and video output. MP3 One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. MPEG-4 AAC An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality than MP3. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs). Sampling frequency/Quantization bit Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”. • Sampling frequency Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate. When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider. • Quantization bit The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more accurate. WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other compression methods. WMA (Windows Media Audio) One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality. En 147 HDMI and video information Network information Component video signal SSID With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. SSID (Service Set Identifier) is a name that identifies a particular wireless LAN access point. Wi-Fi With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined and transmitted with a single cable. Wi-Fi (Wireless Fidelity) is a technology that allows an electronic device to exchange data or connect to the Internet wirelessly using radio waves. Wi-Fi offers the advantage of eliminating the complexity of making connections with network cables by using wireless connection. Only products that complete Wi-Fi Alliance interoperability tests can carry the “Wi-Fi Certified” trademark. Deep Color WPS Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) is a standard established by the Wi-Fi Alliance, which allows easy establishment of a wireless home network. Composite video signal HDCP HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) is a digital copy protection form that prevents copying of digital contents as it travels across connections (such as HDMI). HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. x.v.Color “x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid, natural images. En 148 Yamaha technologies CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor) Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions (such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP, Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own home. CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room. Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound system. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual CINEMA FRONT Virtual CINEMA FRONT allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with front surround speakers. Even if the surround speakers placed in the front, the unit creates the realistic sound field in a listening room. Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) Virtual Presence Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the height of the 3D sound field without front presence speakers. Even if the front presence speakers are not connected, the unit creates the 3D sound field in your room. Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) Virtual Surround Back Speaker allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround back speakers. Even if the surround back speakers are not connected, the unit adds a sense of depth to the rear sound filed of CINEMA DSP. En 149 ■ File formats Supported devices and file formats ❑ USB/PC (NAS) ■ Supported devices Sampling frequency (kHz) Quantization bitrate (bit) Bitrate The number of channels Gapless playback WAV * 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ • A Bluetooth device may not be detected by the unit or some feature may not be compatible, depending on the model. MP3 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — WMA 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — ❑ USB devices MPEG-4 AAC 32/44.1/48 — 8 to 320 2 — • The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (e.g., flash memories or portable audio players) using FAT16 or FAT32 format. FLAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ ALAC 32/44.1/48/88.2/96 16/24 — 2 ✔ AIFF 32/44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 16/24 — 2 ✔ DSD 2.8 MHz/5.6 MHz 1 — 2 — File ❑ Bluetooth device • The unit supports Bluetooth devices that support A2DP or AVRCP. • Do not connect devices other than USB mass storage class devices (such as USB chargers or USB hubs), PCs, card readers, an external HDD, etc. • USB devices with encryption cannot be used. • Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer of the USB storage device. * Linear PCM format only ❑ iPod • To play back FLAC files stored on a PC or NAS, you need to install server software that supports sharing of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files. • Digital Rights Management (DRM) contents cannot be played back. Made for. iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4s, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G iPod touch (2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th generation) iPod nano (2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th and 7th generation) (as of May 2015) • An iPod may not be detected by the unit or some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software version of the iPod. ❑ AirPlay AirPlay works with iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch with iOS 4.3.3 or later, Mac with OS X Mountain Lion or later and Mac and PC with iTunes 10.2.2 or later. (as of May 2015) En 150 Video signal flow Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below. ■ Video conversion table • You can select the resolution and the aspect ratio applied to HDMI-output video processing in “Video Mode” (p.119) in the “Setup” menu. • The unit does not convert 480-line and 576-line video signals interchangeably. Video device The unit HDMI out TV Resolution 480i/ 576i 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 4K 480i/576i m m m m m m m m m m m 720p m m m m 1080i m m m m 1080p/ 50, 60 Hz m m m m m m 480p/576p HDMI in HDMI out HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI HDMI in 1080p/24 Hz COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO m m m m m m m m m m m COMPONENT 720p VIDEO in m m m m 1080i m m m m 480i/576i COMPONENT VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR PR PR PB PB PB PB Y Y Y Y 480p/576p VIDEO VIDEO 480p/ 576p 720p 1080i 1080p 480i/ 576i m m m m m 1080p VIDEO in 480i/ 576i m 4K COMPONENT VIDEO in VIDEO out COMPONENT VIDEO out VIDEO out VIDEO VIDEO VIDEO in m 480i/576i m m m m m m m: Available En 151 Multi-zone output Information on HDMI ■ Audio output Using the unit’s internal amplifier (p.25) HDMI Control Using an external amplifier (p.87) Zone2 Out HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with an HDMI cable. EXTRA SP jacks ZONE OUT jacks HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*1) Digital audio (HDMI) m (*2) m (*2) m (*3) Digital audio (COAXIAL/OPTICAL) m (*4) m (*4) Analog audio (AUDIO) m m Operations available from the TV’s remote control USB (including iPod) (*5) m m • Standby synchronization Network sources (*5) m m • Volume control including mute TUNER m m In For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.28) and “Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.30). • Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner m: Available • Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device *1 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” (Audio Output: On) *2 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *3 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input (stereo output [down mixed to 2-channels] when the input source selected in the main zone is selected) *4 Available when 2-channel PCM signals are input *5 To play back DSD audio in Zone2, select “Main Zone Sync” as the Zone2 input with the web control (p.93) or use the party mode (p.91). • Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker) (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control Playback device also turns off The unit turns off (standby) Turn off the TV ■ Video output Zone2 Out In MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT jacks (*6) COMPONENT VIDEO VIDEO Operations available from the unit’s remote control HDMI OUT 2 (ZONE OUT) jack (*7) m HDMI video Component video Composite video • Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene selection (p.57) • Switching the TV input to display the on-screen menu (when ON SCREEN is pressed) m • Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) using the external device operation keys m m: Available *6 Available when “Monitor Out Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” *7 Available when “HDMI OUT2 Assign” (p.125) in the “Setup” menu is set to “Zone2” En 152 d Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “HDMI”. (Example) HDMI Control HDMI Control Turns on and displays video from the playback device Playback starts Press SCENE (BD/DVD) To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after connecting the TV and playback devices. e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and press ENTER. For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. f Use the cursor keys to select “On”. g Press ON SCREEN. • This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system. 1 2 3 Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players). 4 Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and playback devices. 5 6 7 Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV. Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices. Configure the settings of the unit. a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit. b Press ON SCREEN. ON SCREEN OPTION ON SCREEN Cursor keys ENTER ENTER RETURN DISPLAY Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit. Check the followings. On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not, select the input source manually. c Use the cursor keys to select “Setup” and press ENTER. On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed. 8 Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control. • If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 3 and plugging in the TV again in Step 4. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use. • If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on the TV. • We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively. • We do not assure the operation of all HDMI Control-compatible devices. En 153 Audio Return Channel (ARC) HDMI signal compatibility ARC allows you to input TV audio to the unit with the HDMI cable which transmits video signal to the TV. Audio signals Check the following after the HDMI Control settings. Audio signal type Audio signal format Compatible media (example) 1 2 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multichannel Linear PCM 8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD Select a TV program with the TV remote control. Check that the input source of the unit will be automatically switched to “AUDIO 1” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit. If you cannot hear the TV audio, check the following: – “ARC” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”. – The HDMI cable is connected to the ARC-compatible HDMI jack (HDMI jack marked “ARC”) on the TV. Some HDMI jack on the TV is not compatible with ARC. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the TV. DSD 2 to 5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Video signals The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use an audio cable (digital optical or stereo pin cable) to input TV audio to the unit (p.28). • When using ARC, connect a TV with an HDMI cable that supports ARC. • VGA • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 480i/60 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • “AUDIO 1” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AUDIO 1 jacks, use “TV Audio Input” (p.120) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.58), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE (TV). • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending on the type of the DVD player. • The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction manual for each device. • To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device). For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device. En 154 Reference diagram (rear panel) HDMI (HDCP2.2) HDMI OUT (HDCP2.2) 2 (ZONE OUT) 1 AV 1 AV 2 AV 3 NETWORK AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 ( 3 NET ) WIRELESS AV 7 (1 BD/DVD) ARC AC IN AV 1 AV 2 (1 BD/DVD) AV 3 AV 4 MONITOR OUT/ ZONE OUT PB Y COMPONENT VIDEO Y PR AV 2 PB TRIGGER OUT PR B 1 REMOTE 12V 0.1A MAX. TOTAL PHONO AUDIO 1 AUDIO 2 AUDIO 3 IN RS-232C OUT 2 (2 TV) A Y AV 1 PRE OUT ZONE OUT L PB C PR Y AV 3 (SINGLE) PR PB 1 2 R GND 1 OPTICAL 2 OPTICAL 3 COAXIAL 4 COAXIAL 5 COAXIAL 6 OPTICAL ZONE 2 FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK SUBWOOFER CENTER SPEAKERS R SURROUND L R SURROUND BACK L ZONE 2/F.PRESENCE/ R BI–AMP EXTRA SP L CENTER R FRONT L ANTENNA (4 RADIO) 75Ω FM AM SINGLE (U.S.A. model) • The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections. En 155 Trademarks Bluetooth protocol stack (Blue SDK) Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Atmos, Dolby Surround, Pro Logic, Surround EX, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Copyright 1999-2014 OpenSynergy GmbH All rights reserved. All unpublished rights reserved. The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. This receiver supports network connections. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. Google Noto Fonts Copyright © 2012 Google Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License. “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance. DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. iTunes, AirPlay, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Windows™ Explanations regarding GPL App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries. This product utilizes GPL/LGPL open-source software in some sections. You have the right to obtain, duplicate, modify, and redistribute this open-source code only. For information on GPL/LGPL open source software, how to obtain it, and the GPL/LGPL license, refer to the Yamaha Corporation website (http://download.yamaha.com/sourcecodes/musiccast/). Internet Explorer, Windows Media Audio and Windows Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Yamaha Corporation is under license. Android™ Google Play™ Android and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc. Blu-ray is a trademark of the Blu-ray Disc Association. En 156 Specifications Input jacks Other jacks TUNER • Analog Audio • YPAO MIC x 1 • Analog Tuner Audio x 9 (AV 1–4, AUDIO 1–3, PHONO, V-AUX) [U.K. and Europe models] • REMOTE IN x 1 • Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz) FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER) • REMOTE OUT x 1 Optical x 3 (AV 3, AUDIO 1–2) [Other models] • TRIGGER OUT x 2 Coaxial x 3 (AV 1–2, AUDIO 3) FM/AM x 1 (TUNER) • RS-232C x 1 USB Composite x 5 (AV 1–4, V-AUX) HDMI • Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory Component x 3 (AV 1–3) • HDMI features: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync, ARC • Current Supply Capacity: 1 A • Video (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K Ultra HD • HDMI Input HDMI x 8 (AV 1–7, V-AUX) • Video Format (Repeater Mode) • Sink Function - VGA • Others Bluetooth Source Device to AVR (ex. Smartphone/Tablet) USB x 1 (USB2.0) - 480i/60 Hz NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX/10Base-T) - 576i/50 Hz • Capable of Play/Stop Operation from Sink Device - 480p/60 Hz • Bluetooth Version .................................................Ver. 2.1+EDR Output jacks - 576p/50 Hz • Analog Audio - 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz - Speaker Out x 9 (7 ch) (FRONT L/R, CENTER, • Supported Profile ................................................ A2DP, AVRCP • Supported Codec .....................................................SBC, AAC - 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz *1 SURROUND L/R, SURROUND BACK L/R, EXTRA SP L/R ) - 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Wireless Output............................................. Bluetooth Class 2 *1 Note: Assignment is possible [ZONE2, F.PRESENCE, - 4K/60 Hz, 50Hz, 30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz • Maximum Communication Distance .......................10 m (33 ft) BI-AMP (FRONT L/R)] - Pre Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, • Audio Format Network - Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD • PC Client Function - Subwoofer Out x 2 (SUBWOOFER 1–2, mono) - Dolby Digital Plus • Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5 - ZONE OUT x 1 (ZONE 2) - Dolby Digital - Headphone x 1 • AirPlay supported - DTS-HD Master Audio SURROUND BACK L/R) • Video - DTS-HD High Resolution Audio • Internet Radio • WiFi function MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT - DTS Express - Composite x 1 - DTS - Capable of WPS by PIN Method and Push-Button-Method - Component x 1 - DSD 2-ch to 6-ch - Capable of sharing with iOS devices by wireless connection • HDMI Output HDMI OUT x 2 (HDMI OUT 1–2*) * barter to ZONE OUT (ZONE2) - PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit) • Content Protection: HDCP compatible (HDMI [AV 1–7]: HDCP 2.2 compatible) • Link Function: CEC supported and USB connection - Capable of Direct Connection with Mobile Device - Available Security Method: WEP, WPA2-PSK (AES), Mixed Mode - Radio Frequency Band: 2.4GHz - Wireless Network Standard: IEEE 802.11 b/g/n En 157 Compatible Decoding Formats • Decoding Format - Dolby Atmos - Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus - Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX - DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express - DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 - DTS Digital Surround • Rated Output Power (1-channel driven) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 ) PRE OUT Front L/R ..................................................................140 W/ch - Dolby Pro Logic - Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Except SUBWOOFER (1 kHz)............................. 1.0 V/470  Surround L/R ...........................................................140 W/ch ZONE OUT ............................................................. 1.0 V/470  Surround Back L/R ..................................................140 W/ch • Headphone Impedance....................................... 16  or more (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Front L/R ..................................................................135 W/ch Center .....................................................................135 W/ch Surround Back L/R ..................................................135 W/ch (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 4 ) Dolby Pro Logic IIx Game - Dolby Surround - DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema Audio Section • Rated Output Power (2-channel driven) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 6 ) • Maximum Effective Output Power (1-channel driven) (1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 ) (1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ) (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 ) Front L/R ..........................................................120 W+120 W Center .......................................................................... 120 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) AUDIO 2 etc..................................................... 110 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ..................................................................165 W/ch Surround L/R....................................................120 W+120 W Surround Back L/R ..........................................110 W+110 W AUDIO 2 etc. to Speaker Out (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 55 W/ 8 ) PHONO .............................................................. 95 dB or more Surround Back L/R ..................................................170 W/ch Surround Back L/R ..................................................165 W/ch Surround L/R....................................................110 W+110 W PHONO to PreOut (1 kHz, 1 V) ........................... 0.04% or less (Pure Direct, Input 1 k Shorted, Speaker Out) Surround L/R ...........................................................165 W/ch Center .......................................................................... 110 W PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) ......................................... 0±0.5 dB Surround L/R ...........................................................170 W/ch Center .......................................................................... 120 W Front L/R ..........................................................110 W+110 W • RIAA Equalization Deviation Center......................................................................170 W/ch Center......................................................................165 W/ch Surround Back L/R ..........................................120 W+120 W AUDIO 2 etc. (10 Hz to 100 kHz)................................ +0/-3 dB ............................................................................ 0.04% or less Front L/R ..................................................................170 W/ch Front L/R ..........................................................120 W+120 W (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ) • Frequency Response • Total Harmonic Distortion Front L/R [U.K. and Europe models] .......................170 W/ch Dolby Pro Logic II Game - Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, SUBWOOFER (50 Hz)......................................... 1.0 V/470  Center......................................................................140 W/ch Surround L/R ...........................................................135 W/ch • Post Decoding Format • Output Level / Output Impedance Speaker Out ....................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (Input 1 k Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO ....................................................75 dB/60 dB or more • Dynamic Power (IHF) Front L/R (8/6/4/2 )...................................135/165/210/280 W AUDIO 2 etc.............................................75 dB/60 dB or more • Volume Control • Damping Factor Front L/R, 1 kHz, 8  ............................................. 150 or more • Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance PHONO (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ................................ 3.5 mV/47 k AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 ) ...................... 200 mV/47 k • Maximum Input Signal Surround L/R....................................................120 W+120 W PHONO (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .............................. 60 mV or more Surround Back L/R ..........................................120 W+120 W AUDIO 2 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ........................ 2.4 V or more En 158 Main Zone ................ MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) Zone2 ....................... MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB (0.5 dB Step) • Tone Control Characteristics Main Zone Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz Zone2 Bass Boost/Cut .........................±6.0 dB/50 Hz (0.5 dB Step) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) • Standby Power Consumption Mono/Stereo ..........................................................65 dB/64 dB • Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ............................................................ 0.5%/0.6% • Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced AM section Treble Boost/Cut ..................... ±6.0 dB/20 kHz (0.5 dB Step) [Asia and General models] ..... 530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back: Small) [Other models] ........................................ 531 kHz to 1611 kHz Wireless (Wi-Fi) ............................................................. 2.1 W Wireless Direct .............................................................. 2.2 W HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On (Wired), Bluetooth Standby On ......................................................................................... 1.9 W • Power Supply HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), .................................................................................. 12 dB/oct. [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..........................AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model] ............AC 110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model]..................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz Video Section [Korea model] .................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz • Video Signal Type ....................................... NTSC/PAL/SECAM [Australia model] .............................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz • Video Signal Level [U.K. and Europe models] ..............................AC 230 V, 50 Hz Component HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby On, General L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct. Composite ............................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Network Standby Off........................................................ 1.4 W Wired ............................................................................. 2.1 W [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................. 530 kHz to 1710 kHz • Filter Characteristics ......................................................................................... 0.1 W HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals), Bluetooth Standby Off • Tuning Range Bass Turnover............................................................. 350 Hz Treble Turnover .......................................................... 3.5 kHz HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off, Network Standby Off [Asia model] ....................................AC 220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption Network Standby On (Wireless Direct), Bluetooth Standby On ......................................................................................... 2.9 W • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] ........................................... 1190 W • Dimensions (W x H x D) ......................435 x 182 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 7-1/8” x 17-1/4”) * Including legs and protrusions • Reference Dimensions (W x H x D) Y.......................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω [U.S.A. model].................................................................450 W Pb/Pr ................................................................ 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω [Canada and Korea models]...........................................380 W • Video Maximum Input Level .......................... 1.5 Vp-p or more [Other models] ................................................................420 W (with wireless antenna upright) ......................435 x 247 x 439 mm (17-1/8” x 9-3/4” x 17-1/4”) • Weight ........................................................... 14.9 kg (32.8 lbs) • Signal to Noise Ratio ..........................................60 dB or more • Monitor Out Frequency Response Component (MONITOR OUT/ZONE OUT) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. ............................................................5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB FM Section • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ..............87.5 MHz to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] .......................................87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models].................................87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.) Mono................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf) En 159 Index Symbols Exclamation mark (!) Lock icon (o) 127 Dimmer (Front Display) 126 DLNA 76 DMC (Digital Media Controller) 102 Dolby Atmos 17, 38, 59, 118 DSP Program (front display information) 130, 135 Numerics 2.1-channel system 18 2ch Stereo 62 4K Ultra HD 154 5.1-channel system 18 7.1+2-channel system 17 7.1-channel system 17 7ch Stereo 62 E ECO 128 Error indication (front display) External power amplifier 26 Extra Bass 99 I Backup/recovery of the settings 133 Banana plug 21 Basic speaker configuration 17 Bluetooth 69 Bookmark 82 Initial Volume 118, 125 Input jack assignment 126 Input Trim 100 Internet radio 80 iPod content playback 70 iPod content playback (AirPlay) C L Lipsync 39 D Decoder Off (front display information) Dialogue 99, 129 96 147 M MAC Address Filter 122 Max Volume 117, 124 Memory Guard 127 Menu language selection 37 En 160 NAS content playback 77 Network Connection 121 Network information 130 Network Name 130 Network Standby 122 97 Parametric EQ 116 Party mode 91 Power Amp Assign 113 Preset station selection (FM/AM radio) Pure Direct 64 HDCP 139, 140 HDMI OUT2 Assign 125 HDMI output selection 56 HDMI signal compatibility 154 B 96 P H 96 N Option menu Firmware update 131, 134 FM radio 65 Frequency step setting 65, 132 Front display information 96 Adaptive DRC 98 ADVANCED SETUP 131 AirPlay 83 AM radio 65 ARC (Audio Return Channel) 154 Audio Decoder (front display information) Auto Power Standby 128 Auto Preset (FM radio) 68 85 O F A CINEMA DSP 60 CINEMA DSP 3D Mode 118 Compressed Music Enhancer 64 Crossover frequency setting (subwoofer) 145 Multiple room playback Muting 56, 91 66 R Radio Data System tuning 67 Remote control 14 Remote control ID 132 Rename 102, 105, 123 Repeat 72, 75, 79 Restoring the default settings 133 S 83 SCENE function 57 Selecting the HDMI 4K signal format Setup menu 109 Short Message 126 Shuffle 72, 75, 79 Signal information 129 Sleep timer 14, 91 Sound program 60, 61 Speaker impedance 16, 20, 131 Standby Through 111 133 Straight decode 63 Subwoofer Trim 99 Surround decoder 63 T Test Tone 116 Tone Control 98 Trigger function 36, 127 U USB storage device content playback 73 V Virtual CINEMA FRONT 18, 62 Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) 17 Virtual Surround Back Speaker (VSBS) 17, 118 W Wallpaper 126 Web control 93 Wireless (Wi-Fi) 48, 121 Wireless Direct 54, 121 WPS 50 Y YPAO (Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer) YPAO Volume 98 39 Z Zone2 85, 124 En 161 © 2015 Yamaha Corporation YH114B0/EN